skma 4523 aircraft design 2 final project report...4.5.1 schrenk’s approximation method 101 4.5.2...

245
SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT GROUP THREE UNIVERSITI TEKNOLOGI MALAYSIA

Upload: others

Post on 04-Dec-2020

3 views

Category:

Documents


0 download

TRANSCRIPT

Page 1: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2

FINAL PROJECT REPORT

GROUP THREE

UNIVERSITI TEKNOLOGI MALAYSIA

Page 2: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

ii

Group Members:

1. Ten Jia Yee A17KM0432

2. Thevan Tangaraju A16KM0459

3. Shathasivam Parumasivam A16KM0509

4. Muhammad Imran Aiman Idris B17KM0032

5. Athiseshan Balan A16KM0047

6. Nur Amyra Mohd Aseme B17KM0051

7. Nur Aizat Nazihah Azmi B17KM0050

8. Melvin John A16KM0164

9. Siti Mastura Maskor A16KM0492

10. Wee Jun Wei A16KM0474

11. Shakgantan Balakrishnan A16KM0427

Lecturer’s Name:

Ir. Dr.-Ing. M. Nazri M. Nasir

Dr. Wan Zaidi Bin Wan Omar

Page 3: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

iii

TABLE OF CONTENTS

TITLE PAGE

TABLE OF CONTENTS iii

LIST OF TABLES viii

LIST OF FIGURES xi

CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION 1

1.1 Introduction 1

1.2 Cost Estimation 3

1.3 3D-Modelling Design 3

CHAPTER 2 PROPULSION SYSTEM AND AIRCRAFT

PERFORMANCE 8

2.1 Background Study on Electronic Parts Selection 8

2.1.1 Motor Selection 8

2.1.2 Propeller Selection 10

2.1.3 Battery Selection 14

2.1.4 Electronic Speed Controller (ESC) Selection 15

2.2 Performance 16

2.2.1 Thrust Required, TR 16

2.2.2 Power Available, PA 18

2.2.3 Power Required, PR 18

2.2.4 Rate of Climb 18

2.2.5 Endurance 20

2.2.6 Range 20

2.2.7 Take-off Performance 20

2.2.8 Landing Performance 22

2.2.9 V-n Diagram 22

2.3 Performance Calculation 23

2.3.1 Sample calculation of Thrust Required, TR 23

Page 4: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

iv

2.3.2 Sample calculation of Power Available 24

2.3.3 Sample calculation of Power Required 25

2.3.4 Calculation for Rate of Climb, R/C 25

2.3.5 Calculation for Endurance 25

2.3.6 Calculation for Range 26

2.3.7 Calculation for Take-off Performance 26

2.3.8 Calculation for Landing Performance 27

2.3.9 V-n Diagram 30

CHAPTER 3 AVIONICS AND CONTROL 33

3.1 CG Locations 33

3.1.1 Maximum weight CG 36

3.1.2 Empty weight CG 38

3.1.3 Forward CG 39

3.1.4 Aft CG 40

3.2 Stability 42

3.2.1 Longitudinal Stability 42

3.2.1.1 Wing Section Lift-Curve Slope 42

3.2.1.2 Wing Lift-Curve Slope 43

3.2.1.3 Wing Pitching Moment 44

3.2.1.4 Wing-Body Lift-Curve Slope 45

3.2.1.5 Downwash Gradient 47

3.2.1.6 Tail Section Lift-Curve 48

3.2.1.7 Tail Lift Curve Slope 49

3.2.1.8 Maximum Angle of Attack 50

3.2.1.9 Calculation for Equation of

Longitudinal Static Stability 52

Calculation for Static Margin 59

3.2.2 Lateral Stability 60

3.3 Communication Signals (Transmitter-Receiver) 63

3.3.1 Transmitter 63

3.3.1.1 Specifications of Transmitter 64

Page 5: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

v

3.3.1.2 Chosen Transmitter 67

3.3.2 Receiver (RX) 71

3.3.2.1 Chosen Receiver 72

3.3.3 Converting Signals from Transmitter to Receiver 76

3.3.4 Signal Interference 77

3.3.4.1 Possible Signal Interferences 78

3.3.4.2 Technology to Reduce Interferences 78

3.3.5 Communication resolution 80

3.3.6 Antenna 81

3.3.6.1 Antenna Type 82

3.3.6.2 Gains 83

CHAPTER 4 WING ANALYSIS 85

4.1 Introduction 85

4.2 Wing Configuration 87

4.3 Shear and Bending Stresses 88

4.3.1 Wing without ailerons 90

4.3.2 Wing with ailerons 93

4.4 Lift Distribution of Aileron 97

4.5 Wing Loading 100

4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101

4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108

4.6 Wing Mounting 109

CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

ANALYSIS 114

5.1 Fuselage 114

5.1.2 Introduction 114

5.1.3 Shear Force and Bending Moment Diagram 115

5.1.3.1 Shear Flow Diagram (3g) 115

5.1.3.2 Bending Moment Diagram (3g) 116

5.1.3.3 Shear Flow Diagram (-1.5g) 117

Page 6: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

vi

5.1.3.4 Bending Moment Diagram (-1.5g) 118

5.1.4 Shear and Flexural Analysis 119

5.1.4.1 Conceptual Structural Analysis 119

5.1.4.2 Flexural Shear Flow 121

5.1.4.3 Fuselage Shear Flow 122

5.1.5 Structural Analysis 123

5.1.6 Compressive- Buckling Analysis 126

5.1.6.1 Former Structure 126

5.1.6.2 Bulkhead Structure 127

5.1.7 Shear- Buckling Analysis 128

5.1.7.1 Former Structure 128

5.1.7.2 Bulkhead Structure 129

5.2 Landing Gear 130

5.2.1 Main landing gear simulation analysis 130

5.2.2 Rear landing gear simulation analysis 131

5.2.3 Front landing gear simulation analysis 135

5.2.4 Discussion 138

CHAPTER 6 EMPENNAGE ANALYSIS 139

6.1 Introduction 139

6.2 Preliminary Horizontal and Vertical Tail Sizing 140

6.2.1 Choice of Empennage Shape 140

6.2.2 Horizontal and Vertical Stabilizer Sizing 141

6.2.3 Theoretical Analysis of Horizontal and Vertical

Stabilizers 142

6.2.3.1 Horizontal and Vertical Stabilizer Effectiveness 142

6.2.3.2 Horizontal and Vertical Stabilizer Strength 145

6.3 Preliminary Control Surfaces Sizing 160

6.3.1 Control Surface Sizing 160

6.3.2 Theoretical Analysis of Control Surfaces 164

Page 7: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

vii

6.3.2.1 Theoretical Lift calculation at different angle of deflection 164

6.4 Strength of adhesive on the joint between tail and fuselage 173

CHAPTER 7 FLIGHT PLANNING AND TESTING 175

7.1 Flight Test 175

7.1.1 Pre-Flight Test 175

7.1.2 Preparation 177

7.1.3 Execution 177

7.1.4 Analysis and reporting 178

7.2 Flight Test Location 179

7.3 RC Airplane pre-flight checklist 180

7.4 Performing Range Check 182

7.5 Meteorological Conditions on Site 183

7.6 Flying Site 184

REFERENCES 187

APPENDICES 188

Page 8: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

viii

LIST OF TABLES

TABLE NO. TITLE PAGE

Table 1.1 Cost estimation 3

Table 2.1 Part of manufacturer datasheet 11

Table 2.2 Value of thrust and current in three flight conditions 12

Table 2.3 Data for theoretical thrust and efficiency 13

Table 2.4 Performance data 28

Table 3.1 Calculations for maximum weight CG of aircraft 37

Table 3.2 Calculations for empty weight CG of aircraft 38

Table 3.3 Calculations for forward CG of aircraft 39

Table 3.4 Calculations for aft CG of aircraft 41

Table 3.5 Total pitching moment coefficient of gross weight CG with various angle of attack 54

Table 3.6 Total pitching moment coefficient of empty weight CG with various angle of attack 55

Table 3.7 Total pitching moment coefficient of forward CG with various angle of attack 56

Table 3.8 Total pitching moment coefficient of aft CG with various angle of attack 57

Table 3.9 Major sequence of channels 66

Table 3.10 Assigned channels of transmitter 69

Table 3.11 Operation specifications of transmitter 69

Table 3.12 RF modes of transmitter 71

Table 3.13 Operation specifications of receiver 72

Table 3.14 Channels of receiver 76

Table 3.15 Functions of rubber ducky antenna components 82

Table 3.16 Units of gain 84

Table 4.1 Wing Configuration 87

Table 4.2 Aileron Configuration 88

Page 9: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

ix

Table 4.3 Shear and bending stresses for load factor -1.5g, 1g and 3g without aileron 93

Table 4.4 Comparison of shear and bending stresses for load factor -1.5g, 1g and 3g 96

Table 4.5 Calculated data at different angle of attack for aileron 99

Table 4.6 Wing specification 101

Table 4.7 Wing Loading Data 102

Table 4.8 Wing Loading Result 103

Table 4.9 Calculation Result 104

Table 5.1 Flange analysis 120

Table 5.2 Flexural shear flow at each stiffener 121

Table 5.3 Constant shear flow at each stiffener 122

Table 5.4 Flexural shear system 122

Table 5.5 Physical properties 123

Table 5.6 Component Weight 123

Table 5.7 Volumetric properties 131

Table 5.8 Material properties 131

Table 5.9 Load and fixtures detail of rear landing gear 132

Table 5.10 Reaction forces and moments 132

Table 5.11 Volumetric properties 135

Table 5.12 Material properties 135

Table 5.13 Load and fixtures detail of front landing gear 136

Table 5.14 Simulation results of front landing gear 136

Table 6.1 NACA 0012 horizontal stabilizer dimensions and sizing 141

Table 6.2 NACA 0012 vertical stabilizer dimensions and sizing 142

Table 6.3 Suggestions for tail volume ratio of horizontal tail by various authors (Raymer 1992, Jenkinson 1999, Roskam 1985, Torenbeek 1982, Nicolai 1975, Schaufele 2007) 144

Table 6.4 Suggestions for tail volume ratio of vertical tail by various authors (Raymer 1992, Jenkinson 1999, Roskam 1985, Torenbeek 1982, Nicolai 1975, Schaufele 2007) 145

Page 10: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

x

Table 6.9 Table of lift, lift coefficient and velocity at different angle of attack for elevator 170

Table 6.10 Table of lift, lift coefficient and velocity at different angle of attack for rudder 171

Table 7.1 Flight test checklist 180

Page 11: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

xi

LIST OF FIGURES

FIGURE NO. TITLE PAGE

Figure 1.1 Project Flowchart 2

Figure 1.2 3D Design 4

Figure 1.3 Side view 5

Figure 1.4 Front and back view 6

Figure 1.5 Top view 7

Figure 2.1 Brushless Motor SunnySky X2216 KV1100 8

Figure 2.2 Graph power required versus velocity 9

Figure 2.3 Graph TR and TA versus velocity 10

Figure 2.4 Propeller Gemfan APC9045 11

Figure 2.5 TCBWORTH 5200mAh 4S 14.8V 60C Lipo Battery XT60 14

Figure 2.6 The flight power consumption of the aircraft 15

Figure 2.7 Hobbywing Skywalker 40A 16

Figure 2.8 Comparison of lift-induced and zero-lift thrust required 17

Figure 2.9 Free body diagram of a climbing aircraft 19

Figure 2.10 Airplane take-off procedures 21

Figure 2.11 Flight Envelope 31

Figure 3.1 CG for each components 36

Figure 3.2 Maximum CG 37

Figure 3.3 Empty Weight CG 39

Figure 3.4 Forward CG 40

Figure 3.5 Aft CG 41

Figure 3.6 Moment coefficient versus angle of attack for gross weight CG 55

Figure 3.7 Moment coefficient versus angle of attack for empty weight CG 56

Figure 3.8 Moment coefficient versus angle of attack for forward CG 57

Page 12: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

xii

Figure 3.9 Moment coefficient versus angle of attack for aft CG 58

Figure 3.10 Positive sideslip angle 61

Figure 3.11 Shape of wing tips 61

Figure 3.12 Graph of rolling moment versus sideslip angle 62

Figure 3.13 Block diagram of radio transmitter [4] 63

Figure 3.14 Spectrum graph analysis of some common ISM systems 65

Figure 3.15 Components of transmitter 66

Figure 3.16 Transmitter modes 67

Figure 3.17 FrSky Taranis Q X7 transmitter 67

Figure 3.18 Channel switches of transmitter 68

Figure 3.19 Spectrum analysis of ACCST system 70

Figure 3.20 Block diagram of radio receiver 71

Figure 3.21 FrSky V8R4-II 2.4Ghz 4CH receiver 72

Figure 3.22 Example of analogue signal and its corresponding PWM and PPM signals 73

Figure 3.23 Wiring Diagram of Flight Testing 77

Figure 3.24 Types of spread-spectrum technology 79

Figure 3.25 Communication resolution 80

Figure 3.26 Relationship between resolution and dynamic range 81

Figure 3.27 Block diagram of typical radio system [4] 81

Figure 3.28 Components of rubber ducky antenna 82

Figure 3.29 Radiation pattern of dipole antenna 83

Figure 3.30 3D radiation pattern of dipole antenna 83

Figure 4.1 Streamline on airfoil surface 85

Figure 4.2 Different types of monoplane 86

Figure 4.3 Full dimension of half wing with aileron 88

Figure 4.4 Front view of the aircraft 89

Figure 4.5 Free body diagram for g = -1.5 without aileron 90

Figure 4.6 Shear force and bending moment diagram for g = -1.5 without aileron 90

Page 13: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

xiii

Figure 4.7 Free body diagram for g = 1 without aileron 91

Figure 4.8 Shear force and bending moment diagram for g = 1 without aileron 91

Figure 4.9 Free body diagram for g = 3 without aileron 91

Figure 4.10 Shear force and bending moment diagram for g = 3 without aileron 92

Figure 4.11 Free body diagram for g = -1.5 with aileron 94

Figure 4.12 Shear force and bending moment diagram for g = -1.5 with aileron 94

Figure 4.13 Free body diagram for g = 1 with aileron 94

Figure 4.14 Shear force and bending moment diagram for g = 1 with aileron 95

Figure 4.15 Free body diagram for g = 3 with aileron 95

Figure 4.16 Shear force and bending moment diagram for g = 3 with aileron 95

Figure 4.17 2D body surface of aileron 97

Figure 4.18 Graph of Lift against Angle of Attack 100

Figure 4.19 Graph Cl vs y 105

Figure 4.20 Graph cCl vs y 105

Figure 4.21 Graph Cy vs y 105

Figure 4.22 Graph Ln vs y 106

Figure 4.23 Graph V vs y 106

Figure 4.24 Graph M vs y 106

Figure 4.25 Step of wing mounting using rubber bands 110

Figure 4.26 Rubber band size 110

Figure 4.27 Young's Modulus of several items 111

Figure 5.1 Shear force diagram for fuselage at 3g 115

Figure 5.2 Bending moment diagram for fuselage at 3g 116

Figure 5.3 Shear force diagram for fuselage at -1.5g 117

Figure 5.4 Bending moment diagram for fuselage at -1.5g 118

Figure 5.5 Stringer location at side 120

Page 14: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

xiv

Figure 5.6 Component weight 124

Figure 5.7 Side view 124

Figure 5.8 Component weight 125

Figure 5.9 Isometric view 125

Figure 5.10 Bottom part of fuselage 125

Figure 5.11 Rear landing gear 131

Figure 5.12 Static stress 133

Figure 5.13 Static displacement 134

Figure 5.14 Static strain 134

Figure 5.15 Front landing gear 135

Figure 5.16 Static Stress 137

Figure 5.17 Static strain 137

Figure 6.1 Structural configuration of the empennage 139

Figure 6.2 Tail configuration of our design 140

Figure 6.3 Calculation on effectiveness of horizontal stabilizer 143

Figure 6.4 Calculation on effectiveness of vertical stabilizer 144

Figure 6.5 Lift distribution of the front view of the tail plane at G =-1.5 146

Figure 6.6 Shear and bending moment diagram at G = -1.5 146

Figure 6.7 Lift distribution of the front view of the tail pla ne at G = 1.0 147

Figure 6.8 Shear and bending moment diagram at G = 1.0 147

Figure 6.9 Lift distribution of the front view of the tail plane at G = 3.0 148

Figure 6.10 Shear and bending moment diagram at G = 3.0 148

Figure 6.11 Free body diagram of stabilizer under shear and bending conditions 150

Figure 7.1 Location of flight test from Google Map 179

Figure 7.2 UTM Marching Paddock (Padang Kawad UTM) 180

Figure 7.3 Johor average and max wind speed and gust (kmph) 183

Figure 7.4 Average temperature of location selected 184

Figure 7.5 Average rainfall days of location selected 184

Figure 7.6 The designed flying site 186

Page 15: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

xv

Page 16: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

1

CHAPTER 1

INTRODUCTION

1.1 Introduction

Unmanned aerial vehicle (UAV) can be defined as a flying machine without

pilot onboard. Therefore, it can be operated by human operator with remote control

or fully autonomously by computers onboard [1]. Usually, it is used to complete dull,

dangerous and dirty (3D) missions [2]. This is due to its ease of deployment, ability

to hover and high-mobility [3]. Although UAV is mainly used in military sector at the

beginning, its applications are quickly expanding to other sectors such as agricultural,

logistics, aerial photography and recreational use.

In this project, an UAV airplane is required to be designed. The design

criterions are stated as below:

1. Maximum gross weight is 5 kg.

2. Maximum load factor is 3 whereas the minimum load factor is -1.5.

3. The maximum speed of aircraft is 20 m/s.

4. The aircraft must be able to carry 500g payload.

The flowchart of the design project is displayed in figure 1.1

Page 17: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

2

Figure 1.1 Project Flowchart

Start

Selection of group members

Distribution into five sub-groups

Carry out feasibility study

Determine the main aircraft specifications

Electronic

components selection

Aircraft CG

components and stability

Structural analysis

Control system

Flight planning and preparation

End

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

No

No

Page 18: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

3

1.2 Cost Estimation

Financial plan is required when fabricating an UAV airplane as the components

have to be bought. The cost estimation of this project is shown in table 1.1.

Item Price

(Rm)

Shipping

Fee (Rm)

Delivery

(Days) Description Link

Battery 165.00 3.50 2-12 14.8/4s

5200mah lazada

Propeller 11.50 4.13 3-21 APC 9045 shopee

Motor 70.00 1.00 3-21 X2216 1100kv shopee

ESC 40.00 3.50 2-15 40A Brushless lazada

Foam 100.00 11.00 2-7 5 pieces

Battery

Checker 5.00 - 2-7 buzzer

Receiver 79.00 - 2-7 2.4Ghz

Sub-Total 470.50 23.13

TOTAL

(RM) 493.63

Table 1.1 Cost estimation

1.3 3D-Modelling Design

First and foremost, the aircraft model has to be designed. The drawings are

drawn in Solidworks to visualize the designed aircraft model. Figure 1.2 shows the 3D

design of the aircraft. At the same time, figures 1.3, 1.4 and 1.5 depicts the side view,

front view and top view of the aircraft respectively.

Page 19: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

4

Figure 1.2 3D Design

Page 20: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

5

Figure 1.3 Side view

Page 21: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

6

Figure 1.4 Front and back view

Page 22: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

7

Figure 1.5 Top view

Page 23: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

8

CHAPTER 2

PROPULSION SYSTEM AND AIRCRAFT PERFORMANCE

2.1 Background Study on Electronic Parts Selection

2.1.1 Motor Selection

For motor selection, there are several factors that need to be taken into

consideration which is brushless motor KV, size and thrust to weight ratio that depends

on the type of aircraft (Pond, 2009). The first one is brushless motor KV. The motor

KV indicates the number of revolutions per minute spin per volt. The lower the KV,

the stronger the motor. As a result, a larger propeller needed for maximum thrust. The

next factor to considering a motor is size (Remzak, 2017).

Since the aircraft needs to have a higher thrust and not higher speed, the

suitable motor with the KV value between 850 and 1500 is chosen. For our aircraft,

brushless motor SunnySky X2216 KV1100 is chosen as shown in figure 2.1.

Figure 2.1 Brushless Motor SunnySky X2216 KV1100

Page 24: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

9

According to FliteTest website, it is better to choose the motor that can produce

more thrust than the weight of airplane. The maximum velocity given for this project

is 20m/s. So, we need to choose motor that can obtain desired velocity less than 20m/s

by plotting graph power required versus velocity.

From graph power required versus velocity as shown in figure 2.2, the

intersection point between power required and power available is the design speed for

our aircraft. The power required can be calculated by referring the motor specification

obtained from the manufacturer. We need to choose a random motor KV in the range

between 850 and 1500 to obtain the design speed of our aircraft not more than 20 m/s.

Since the design speed obtained is 19.3 m/s which is less than 20 m/s, then the motor

KV that we choose which is KV1100 is good enough.

Figure 2.2 Graph power required versus velocity

From the figure, PR indicates the power required whereas PA indicates the

power available. At the same time, 2PR is referred to the value of doubling the power

required. In this case, we only refer the 2PR to obtain the design speed for our aircraft.

The reason we used 2PR is because of it is more realistic. In other words, PR is a very

optimistic assumption where usually aircraft requires more than that.

0

100

200

300

400

500

600

700

0 6

7.5 9

10.

5 12

13

14.

5 16

17.

5 19

20.

5 22

23.

5 25

26.

5 28

29.

5 31

32.

5 34

PR

Velocity (m/s)

Power Required

2PR

PR

PA(1500)

Poly. (2PR)

Page 25: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

10

Figure 2.3 Graph TR and TA versus velocity

In steady, level flight, the maximum velocity of the aircraft is determined by

the high speed intersection of the thrust required and thrust available curves. Therefore,

figure 2.3 is plotted due to the thrust available (TA) must be always higher than thrust

required (TR) to ensure that the aircraft can function properly. From figure 2.3, the

maximum velocity is 21.5 m/s, which is more than design speed, 19.3 m/s obtained

from figure 2.2. Thus, the conclusion that the motor used in the aircraft can always

provide enough thrust to the aircraft.

2.1.2 Propeller Selection

After selecting the motor, the propellers that match with the motor is listed.

Table 2.1 shows part of the manufacturer datasheet. From the table, the recommended

propeller is APC 9045 as shown in figure 2.4.

0

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

16

18

20

0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40

Thru

st

Velocity

TR and TA vs Velocity

TR

TA

Poly. (TR)

Poly. (TA)

Page 26: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

11

Table 2.1 Part of manufacturer datasheet

Prop(inch) Voltage(V) Amps(A) Thrust(gf) Watts(W) Efficiency

(g/W)

APC9045 14.8

0.7 100 10.36 9.652509653

1.7 200 25.16 7.949125596

2.7 300 39.96 7.507507508

4.2 400 62.16 6.435006435

5.7 500 84.36 5.926979611

7.3 600 108.04 5.553498704

9 700 133.2 5.255255255

10.6 800 156.88 5.099439062

12.5 900 185 4.864864865

14.6 1000 216.08 4.627915587

16.4 1100 242.72 4.531970995

Figure 2.4 Propeller Gemfan APC9045

By referring information from table 2.1, the estimated current used for take-off,

cruising and landing can be obtained by using interpolation. The values of estimated

current are displayed in table 2.2.

Page 27: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

12

Table 2.2 Value of thrust and current in three flight conditions

Take-off Cruising Landing

Thrust (gf) 770 550 220

Current (A) 10.12 6.5 1.9

Since the propeller diameter expressed in inches, the theoretical thrust can be

calculated by using equation below:

𝑇𝑔𝑟𝑎𝑚 = (𝑃𝐷𝑖𝑛𝑐ℎ

𝐶)

23

where C is the air density dependent coefficient 30° C,1 atm:

𝑇𝑔𝑟𝑎𝑚 =1

0.0127√

𝑔3

2𝜋𝑄𝑎𝑖𝑟= 0.02780

At the same time, the efficiency of the motor and the propeller is given by:

𝐸𝑓𝑓𝑖𝑐𝑖𝑒𝑛𝑐𝑦 =𝑡ℎ𝑟𝑢𝑠𝑡

𝑡ℎ𝑒𝑜𝑟𝑒𝑡𝑖𝑐𝑎𝑙 𝑡ℎ𝑟𝑢𝑠𝑡× 100%

For sample calculation, the maximum thrust is taken therefore:

𝐸𝑓𝑓𝑖𝑐𝑖𝑒𝑛𝑐𝑦 =1100

1824 .226722× 100% = 60.3%

As a result, the efficiency that with unit of percentage can be obtained and

shown in table 2.3.

Page 28: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

13

Table 2.3 Data for theoretical thrust and efficiency

Prop

(inch)

Voltage

(V)

Amps

(A)

Thrust

(gf)

Watts

(W)

Efficiency

(g/W) C

Theoretical

Thrust Efficiency (%) Efficiency

APC9045 14.8

0.7 100 10.36 9.652509653 0.028037 222.7998741 44.88332877 0.448833288

1.7 200 25.16 7.949125596 0.028037 402.5460122 49.68376135 0.496837613

2.7 300 39.96 7.507507508 0.028037 547.9724914 54.74727376 0.547472738

4.2 400 62.16 6.435006435 0.028037 735.6689753 54.37228066 0.543722807

5.7 500 84.36 5.926979611 0.028037 901.7776863 55.44603815 0.554460382

7.3 600 108.04 5.553498704 0.028037 1063.485292 56.4182697 0.564182697

9 700 133.2 5.255255255 0.028037 1222.769472 57.24709491 0.572470949

10.6 800 156.88 5.099439062 0.028037 1363.704137 58.66375106 0.586637511

12.5 900 185 4.864864865 0.028037 1522.14581 59.12705566 0.591270557

14.6 1000 216.08 4.627915587 0.028037 1688.177671 59.23547132 0.592354713

16.4 1100 242.72 4.531970995 0.028037 1824.226722 60.29952236 0.602995224

Page 29: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

14

2.1.3 Battery Selection

The selection of battery is mainly related to the endurance of the aircraft. The

most important parameter is the battery capacity. Battery capacity shows the amount

of current that stores in the battery. Besides, the C value indicates the discharge rate of

the battery. High C value enables the aircraft to have a short response time. Since the

aircraft is designed to have a relatively low speed, the battery does not require a very

high C value. By researching to the battery, the battery selected is TCBWORTH

5200mAh 4S 14.8V 60C Lipo Battery XT60 as shown in figure 2.5.

Figure 2.5 TCBWORTH 5200mAh 4S 14.8V 60C Lipo Battery XT60

The battery with capacity 5200mAh was chosen by calculating the endurance

for the battery lifetime to fly as one of the design requirements of the aircraft is with 5

minutes of cruising time. Therefore, if we choose low capacity of battery, it is not sure

that our aircraft can fly back and forth to the design location including take-off and

landing time.

𝐸𝑛𝑑𝑢𝑟𝑎𝑛𝑐𝑒 =5200

1000×

0.8

20× 60 = 12.48 𝑚𝑖𝑛

The endurance for the battery 5200mAh is 12.48 minutes. By referring to the

flight consumption graph as shown in figure 2.6, we can obtain the estimated time

during flight including take-off and landing.

Page 30: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

15

Figure 2.6 The flight power consumption of the aircraft

From the graph above, the time taken for our aircraft to take-off, cruising and

landing can be obtained.

𝑡𝑡𝑎𝑘𝑒 𝑜𝑓𝑓 = 0.35 min

𝑡𝑐𝑟𝑢𝑖𝑠𝑖𝑛𝑔 = 5 min

𝑡𝑙𝑎𝑛𝑑𝑖𝑛𝑔 = 2.67 min

Therefore, total estimated time for our aircraft is 8.02 min. Since the endurance

of the battery is more than the estimated time for our aircraft, it is proved that the

battery capacity that was chosen is suitable for our flight test.

2.1.4 Electronic Speed Controller (ESC) Selection

The maximum ampere value of ESC indicates the maximum ampere that can

withstand by the ESC. In other words, it may be burnt out if the current received by

the ESC is higher than the maximum ampere rating. Therefore, the current rating of

ESC must be higher than the maximum current used by the motor.

In usual case, the maximum ampere of the ESC will be stated in manufacturer

datasheet. Based on manufacturer data for the selected motor, it is recommended to

use ESC 30A. But, to make it safe, we choose Hobbywing Skywalker 40A ESC as

shown on Figure 2.7. This is because it is good to use an ESC rated at a higher

0

2

4

6

8

10

12

0 31 60 91 121 152 182 213 244 274 305 335 366 397 425 456 486 517 547

Cu

rren

t (A

)

Time (s)

Flight Power Consumption

ampere

Page 31: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

16

amperage than intend running motor at as an insurance against over stressing the ESC

causing failure and potential damage to aircraft.

Figure 2.7 Hobbywing Skywalker 40A

2.2 Performance

The preliminary performance analysis is a key in determining the feasibility

and effectiveness of the designed aircraft. Basically, parameters for drag polar, power,

thrust, range, endurance and etc. are estimated using equation given from reference

book Anderson (1999).

2.2.1 Thrust Required, TR

In steady flight (unaccelerated flight), the general equation of motions is

derived is such special case giving:

𝑇 = 𝐷

𝐿 = 𝑊

Therefore, to maintain the same amount of speed at certain altitude, the thrust

must be generated to overcome the drag and keep the airplane going. In such case, this

is the thrust required. Thrust required denoted as TR depends on the velocity, altitude,

and the aerodynamic shape, size and weight of the airplane. By using analytical

approach, at steady and level flight, the thrust required can be derived as:

Page 32: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

17

𝑇𝑅 = 𝐷 =𝐷

𝑊𝑊 =

𝐷

𝐿𝑊 =

𝑊

𝐿𝐷

Since TR is a relation to L/D, thus minimum TR occurs when L/D is maximum.

As mention earlier, lift-to-drag ratio is one of the most important parameters affecting

the airplane performance. And since TR=D, therefore:

𝑇𝑅 = 𝐷 = 𝑞∞𝑆𝐶𝐷 = 𝑞∞𝑆(𝐶𝐷,0 + 𝐶𝐷,𝑖)

Note that, 𝐶𝐷,𝑖 = 𝐾𝐶𝐿2 and 𝐿 = 𝑊 so:

𝐾 =1

𝜋𝑒𝐴𝑅 , 𝐶𝐿 = 2𝑊𝜌∞𝑉∞

2𝑆

In other word,

𝑇𝑅 = zero-lift 𝑇𝑅 + lift-induced 𝑇𝑅

where

zero-lift 𝑇𝑅 = thrust required to balance zero-lift drag

lift-induced 𝑇𝑅 = thrust required to balance drag due to lift

At minimum TR,

𝐶𝐷,0 = 𝐶𝐷,𝑖

zero-lift drag = drag due to lift

This yields an interesting aerodynamic result that at minimum thrust required,

zero-lift drag equals drag due to lift. Figure 2.8 shows the relationship between 𝑇𝑅 and

velocity.

Figure 2.8 Comparison of lift-induced and zero-lift thrust required

Page 33: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

18

2.2.2 Power Available, PA

The actual power available supplied by the motor can be calculate using

equation:

𝑃𝐴 = 𝜂 × 𝑃

where,

𝜂 = efficiency of the motor and the propeller

𝑃 = power (W)

2.2.3 Power Required, PR

The general equation for power is the product of force and velocity provided

they are in the same direction as in vector dot product. As the airplane cruising at

certain velocity (free stream velocity), 𝑉∞, times with the thrust required, 𝑇𝑅, yields

the power required, denoted as 𝑃𝑅 (Anderson, 1999).

𝑃𝑅 = 𝑇𝑅𝑉∞

Since 𝑇𝑅 = 𝐷 (for unaccelerated flight) so

𝑃𝑅 = 𝑞∞(𝐶𝐷,0 + 𝐶𝐷,𝑖)𝑉∞

where 𝐶𝐷,𝑖, can be written as 𝐾𝐶𝐿2

Therefore,

𝑃𝑅 = 𝑞∞(𝐶𝐷,0 + 𝐾𝐶𝐿2)𝑉∞

2.2.4 Rate of Climb

Consider an airplane in steady, unaccelerated and climbing flight. The free

body diagram of an aircraft in climbing flight is as shown in figure 2.9.

Page 34: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

19

Figure 2.9 Free body diagram of a climbing aircraft

From figure 2.9, thrust (T) is not only working to overcome drag (D), but for

climbing flight, it is also supporting component of weight of aircraft (W). The equation

of motion can be derived as:

𝑇 − 𝐷 − 𝑊 sin 𝜃 = 0

𝐿 − 𝑊 cos 𝜃 = 0

The vertical velocity of the flight is the rate of climb, 𝑅/𝐶

𝑅/𝐶 = 𝑉∞ sin 𝜃

As mentioned earlier, 𝑇𝐴 𝑉∞ is the power available, 𝑃𝐴 and 𝑇𝑅 𝑉∞ or 𝐷𝑉∞ is the

power required, 𝑃𝑅 to overcome the drag. We define

𝑇𝐴𝑉∞ − 𝑇𝑅 𝑉∞ = 𝐸𝑥𝑐𝑒𝑠𝑠 𝑃𝑜𝑤𝑒𝑟

Hence, substituting sin 𝜃 into the rate of climb, 𝑅/𝐶 can be written as;

𝑅/𝐶 =𝐸𝑥𝑐𝑒𝑠𝑠 𝑃𝑜𝑤𝑒𝑟

𝑊

Note: This formula is an approximation as 𝑃𝑅 = 𝑇𝑅𝑉∞ is for a level flight. Thus

this equation only good for small 𝜃.

Page 35: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

20

2.2.5 Endurance

By definition, endurance is the total time that an airplane stays in the air on a

tank of fuel. In order to obtain a longer time for the aircraft to stay in the air, minimum

number of pounds of fuel per hour need to be used. In order to get maximum endurance

for an aircraft, it need to fly at the lowest minimum power required such that it is flying

at a velocity such (𝐶𝐿3/2/𝐶𝐷) is at maximum. The following formula is used to find

the endurance.

𝐸𝑛𝑑𝑢𝑟𝑎𝑛𝑐𝑒 = 𝑏𝑎𝑡𝑡𝑒𝑟𝑦 𝑐𝑎𝑝𝑎𝑐𝑖𝑡𝑦 ×80% 𝑒𝑓𝑓𝑖𝑐𝑖𝑒𝑛𝑐𝑦 𝑢𝑠𝑒𝑑

𝑐𝑟𝑢𝑖𝑠𝑖𝑛𝑔 𝑐𝑢𝑟𝑟𝑒𝑛𝑡× 60

2.2.6 Range

By definition range is the total distance traversed by the airplane on a tank of

fuel. To obtain the maximum range for an aircraft, the lowest possible specific fuel

consumption need to be used and the aircraft is flying at maximum C𝐿/𝐶𝐷 . The

following formula is used to find the range.

𝑅𝑎𝑛𝑔𝑒 = 𝐸𝑛𝑑𝑢𝑟𝑎𝑛𝑐𝑒 × 𝑉𝑒𝑙𝑜𝑐𝑖𝑡𝑦

2.2.7 Take-off Performance

The total take-off distance take-off distance, as defined in the Federal Aviation

Requirements (FAR), is the sum as defined in the Federal Aviation

Requirements(FAR), is the sums LO and the distance the distance (measured along the

ground) to clear a 35-ft height (for jet-powered civilian transports) or a 50-ft height

(for all other airplanes). The aircraft takeoff operation is shown in figure 2.10.

Page 36: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

21

Figure 2.10 Airplane take-off procedures

Basically, total take-off distance is covered by ground roll, 𝑆𝑔 and airborne

distance, 𝑆𝑎. Ground roll distance is the distance where the aircraft start moving until

the aircraft reach its lift off speed, 𝑉𝐿𝑂 whereas the airborne distance covers the

distance where the aircraft required to clear an obstacle after becoming airborne. In

this chapter we are only interested on the ground roll for take-off. The equation for

ground roll is as follow

𝑆𝐿𝑂 ≈1.44W2

gρ∞SCLmax[T − [D + μr(W − L)]0.7𝑉𝐿𝑂]

where D:

0.5ρ∞𝑉20.7𝑉𝐿𝑂

𝑆 (𝐶𝐷,0 + 𝜑𝐶𝐿

2

𝜋𝑒𝐴𝑅)

𝜑 =(16ℎ/𝑏)2

1 + (16ℎ/𝑏)2

During take-off, the angle of attack of the airplane is restricted by the

requirement that the tail does not drag the ground, therefore assume that CLmax during

ground roll is limited to 1.3 where:

𝑔 = gravitational force

ρ∞ = sea level air density

S = wing area

CLmax = maximum lift during take-off

T = thrust at take-off configuration

𝜇𝑟 = land friction coefficient

𝑊 = weight of an aircraft

Page 37: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

22

2.2.8 Landing Performance

The opposite of the take-off procedure is the landing procedure. Just as in the

take-off, the landing maneuver consists of two parts:

1. The terminal glide over a 50 ft obstacle to touchdown

2. The landing ground run

Ground roll distance is the distance where the aircraft start decelerates until the

velocity goes to zero. Again in this chapter we are only consider about the ground roll

while landing. The equation is as follow.

𝑆𝐿 =1.69W2

gρ∞SCLmax[T𝑟𝑒𝑣 + [D + μr(W − L)]0.7𝑉𝑇𝐷]

where

𝑔 = gravitational force

ρ∞ = sea level air density

S = wing area

CLmax = maximum lift during landing

𝑇𝑟𝑒𝑣 = reversal thrust during landing

𝜇𝑟 = land friction coefficient

𝑊 = weight of an aircraft

2.2.9 V-n Diagram

The V-n diagram plays an important role in aircraft design. The V-n diagram

is a plot between the load factor and the velocity. Load factor is defined as the ratio of

the aerodynamic load to the weight of the aircraft. Aircraft has to perform different

loading conditions at different speeds, controls and high loads due to stormy weather.

But at the same time, it is impossible to investigate all possible loading conditions.

From V-n diagram, we can easily determine the stall region for a particular aircraft at

Page 38: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

23

different flight speed. Also we are able to identify the structural limit on the aircraft.

Beyond the limit, structural damage might occur.

The V-n diagram is drawn referring to FAR 23 standards: Airworthiness

Standards for Normal, Utility, Acrobatic and Commuter Category Airplanes. Since our

UAV is deemed as a normal category aircraft, therefore this standard is the appropriate

one to refer to. Flight load factor is an important parameter in this V-n diagram

generation. Flight load factor is the ratio of aerodynamic force acting on the airplane

to the weight of the airplane. For V-n diagram, we only focus on the maneuver

envelope.

Maneuver Diagram illustrates the variation in load factor with airspeed for

maneuver. At low speeds the maximum load factor is constrained by aircraft maximum

CL. At higher speeds the maneuver load factor may be restricted. According to FAR

23, the normal category is limited to airplanes that have a seating configuration,

excluding pilot seats, of nine or less, a maximum certificated takeoff weight of 12,500

pounds or less, and intended for non-acrobatic operation. Non-acrobatic operation

includes:

I. Any maneuver incident to normal flying

II. Stalls (except whip stalls

III. Lazy eights, chandelles, and steep turns, in which the angle of bank is not

more than 60 degrees

2.3 Performance Calculation

2.3.1 Sample calculation of Thrust Required, TR

Calculate the free stream velocity, 𝑉∞

𝑉∞ = √2𝑊

𝜌∞CLmax𝑆

Page 39: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

24

𝑉∞ = √2 × 7.27525

0.002377 × 1.3 × 4.2195= 33.4058 𝑓𝑡/𝑠

Thrust required, 𝑇𝑅 can be obtained using equation,

𝑇𝑅 = 𝐷 = 𝑞∞𝑆𝐶𝐷 = 𝑞∞𝑆(𝐶𝐷,0 + 𝐾𝐶𝐿2)

𝑇𝑅 =1

2𝜌∞𝑉∞

2𝑆(𝐶𝐷,0 + 𝐾𝐶𝐿2)

where in this case, the velocity used is not free stream velocity, 𝑉∞ and there are

different velocity value.

𝑇𝑅 =1

2𝜌∞𝑉2𝑆(𝐶𝐷,0 + 𝐾𝐶𝐿

2)

where,

𝑊 = 𝐿 = 0.5ρ∞𝑉2𝑆𝐶𝐿

𝐶𝐿 = (2×3.3×9.81)

1.157(5)2(0.392)= 5.39325 (𝑓𝑜𝑟 𝑉 = 5 𝑚/𝑠)

𝐾 = 1

𝜋𝑒𝐴𝑅= 0.0995

𝐶𝐷,0 = 0.02808

𝑆 = 0.392 𝑚2

𝜌∞ = 1.157 𝑘𝑔/𝑚3

𝑊 = 3.3 𝑘𝑔

Therefore,

𝑇𝑅 =1

2(1.157)(5)2(0.392)(0.02808 + (0.0995)(5.3933) 2) = 17.5408

2.3.2 Sample calculation of Power Available

The power available is related to the power generated by the motor. The

calculation of the value is shown as below:

𝑃𝐴 = 𝜂 × 𝑃 = 0.602995224 × 242.72 = 146.359 𝑊 = 107.95 𝑙𝑏. 𝑓𝑡/𝑠

Page 40: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

25

2.3.3 Sample calculation of Power Required

The power required, 𝑃𝑅 at sea level is

𝑃𝑅 = 𝑇𝑅𝑉∞

where in this case, the velocity used is not free stream velocity, 𝑉∞. Since 𝑇𝑅 =

𝐷 (unaccelerated flight)

𝑃𝑅 = 𝑞∞(𝐶𝐷,0 + 𝐾𝐶𝐿2)𝑉

𝑃𝑅 = 1.0680 𝑙𝑏 × 33.4058 𝑓𝑡/𝑠

𝑃𝑅 = 35.6774 𝑙𝑏. 𝑓𝑡/𝑠

2.3.4 Calculation for Rate of Climb, R/C

At sea level,

𝑇𝐴𝑉∞ − 𝑇𝑅𝑉∞ = 𝐸𝑥𝑐𝑒𝑠𝑠 𝑃𝑜𝑤𝑒𝑟

𝑃𝐴 − 𝑃𝑅 = 𝐸𝑥𝑐𝑒𝑠𝑠 𝑃𝑜𝑤𝑒𝑟

107.95 − 35.6774 = 72.2726 𝑙𝑏. 𝑓𝑡/𝑠

𝑅/𝐶 =𝐸𝑥𝑐𝑒𝑠𝑠 𝑃𝑜𝑤𝑒𝑟

𝑊

𝑅/𝐶 =72.2726

7.2725= 9.9378 𝑓𝑡/𝑠

2.3.5 Calculation for Endurance

To calculate the endurance, the following equation is used,

𝐸𝑛𝑑𝑢𝑟𝑎𝑛𝑐𝑒 = 𝑏𝑎𝑡𝑡𝑒𝑟𝑦 𝑐𝑎𝑝𝑎𝑐𝑖𝑡𝑦 ×80% 𝑒𝑓𝑓𝑖𝑐𝑖𝑒𝑛𝑐𝑦 𝑢𝑠𝑒𝑑

𝑐𝑟𝑢𝑖𝑠𝑖𝑛𝑔 𝑐𝑢𝑟𝑟𝑒𝑛𝑡× 60

Page 41: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

26

where,

Battery capacity used = 5200 mAh

Cruising current used = 20 A

𝐸𝑛𝑑𝑢𝑟𝑎𝑛𝑐𝑒 =5200 𝑚𝐴ℎ

1000×

0.8

20× 60 = 12.48 𝑚𝑖𝑛𝑢𝑡𝑒𝑠

2.3.6 Calculation for Range

The following equation is used,

𝑅𝑎𝑛𝑔𝑒 = 𝐸𝑛𝑑𝑢𝑟𝑎𝑛𝑐𝑒 × 𝑉𝑒𝑙𝑜𝑐𝑖𝑡𝑦

where velocity = 19.3 m/s

𝑅𝑎𝑛𝑔𝑒 = 12.48 𝑚𝑖𝑛𝑢𝑡𝑒𝑠 × 19.3 𝑚/𝑠 × 60 = 14,451.8 𝑚

2.3.7 Calculation for Take-off Performance

The following equation is used,

𝑆𝐿𝑂 ≈1.44W2

gρ∞SCLmax[T − [D + μr(W − L)]0.7𝑉𝐿𝑂]

where,

𝑉𝑠𝑡𝑎𝑙𝑙 =√2𝑊

𝜌∞CLmax𝑆= √

2×7.27525

0.002377×1.3×4.2195= 33.4058 𝑓𝑡/𝑠

𝑉𝐿𝑂 = 1.2 𝑉𝑠𝑡𝑎𝑙𝑙 = 1.2 (33.4058) = 40.0870 𝑓𝑡/𝑠

0.7𝑉𝐿𝑂 = 0.7(40.0870) = 28.0609 𝑓𝑡/𝑠

𝜑 = (

16ℎ

𝑏)

2

1+(16ℎ

𝑏)

2 =(

16(0.6851)

4.5932)

2

1+((16(0.6851)

4.5932)

2 = 0.8509

Page 42: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

27

𝑊 = 𝐿 = 0.5ρ∞𝑉20.7𝑉𝐿𝑂

𝑆𝐶𝐿

7.2753 = 0.5 × 0.002377 × 28.0609 2 × 4.2195 × 𝐶𝐿

𝐶𝐿 = 1.8424

𝐶𝐷,𝑖 = 𝜑𝐶𝐿

2

𝜋𝑒𝐴𝑅= 0.8509 (

1.84242

𝜋×0.8621×5) = 0.2133

𝐷𝐿𝑂 =0.5(0.002377)(28.0609) 2(4.2195)(0.02808 + 0.2133) = 0.9532 𝑙𝑏

𝑔 = 32.2 𝑓𝑡/𝑠2

ρ∞ = 0.002377 𝑠𝑙𝑢𝑔/𝑓𝑡3

𝑆 = 4.2195 𝑓𝑡2

μr = 0.02

CLmax = 1.3

𝐿 = 0.5 × 0.002377 × 28.0609 2 × 4.2195 × 1.3 = 5.1334 𝑙𝑏

𝑇 = 𝑃𝐴

𝑉𝐿𝑂=

146.359

40.0870= 3.6510

Therefore,

𝑆𝐿𝑂

= 1.44(7.2753)2

(32.2)(0.002377)(4.2195)(1.3)[3.6510 − [0.9532 + 0.02(7.2753 − 5.1334)]]

𝑆𝐿𝑂 = 68.378 𝑓𝑡 = 20.84 𝑚

2.3.8 Calculation for Landing Performance

The following equation is used,

𝑆𝐿 =1.69W2

gρ∞SCLmax[T𝑟𝑒𝑣 + [D + μr(W − L)]0.7𝑉𝑇𝐷]

where,

μr = 0.02

𝑔 = 32.2 𝑓𝑡/𝑠2

ρ∞ = 0.002377 𝑠𝑙𝑢𝑔/𝑓𝑡3

𝑆 = 4.2195 𝑓𝑡2

Page 43: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

28

𝑊 = 7.2753 𝑙𝑏

V𝑇 = 1.3 𝑉𝑠𝑡𝑎𝑙𝑙 = 1.3 (33.4058) = 43.4275 𝑓𝑡/𝑠

0.7𝑉𝑇 = 0.7(43.4275) = 30.3993 𝑓𝑡/𝑠

𝐿 = 0.5(0.002377) (30.3993) 2(4.2195)(1.3) = 6.0246 𝑙𝑏

𝑊 = 𝑊1

7.2753 = 0.5 × 0.002377 × 30.3993 2 × 4.2195 × 𝐶𝐿

𝐶𝐿 = 1.5699

𝐶𝐷,𝑖 = 𝜑𝐶𝐿

2

𝜋𝑒𝐴𝑅= 0.8509 (

1.56992

𝜋×0.8621×5) = 0.1549

𝐷𝐿𝑂= 0.5(0.002377)(30.3993) 2(4.2195)(0.02808 + 0.1549) = 0.8480 𝑙𝑏

𝑇𝑟𝑒𝑣 = 0 𝑙𝑏

Therefore,

𝑆𝐿 =1.69(7.2753 )2

(32.2)(0.002377)(4.2195)(1.3)[0 + [0.8480 + 0.02(7.2753 − 0 )]0.7𝑉𝑇𝐷]

𝑆𝐿 = 214.45 𝑓𝑡 = 65 𝑚

In short, table 2.4 shows the calculated values by using the equations from the

performance part.

Table 2.4 Performance data

V

(m/s) 𝐶𝐿 𝐶𝐷 2𝐷 𝐷 = 𝑇𝑅 𝑃𝑅 2𝑃𝑅 𝑃𝐴(1500)

5 5.3933 2.9223 35.0817 17.5408 87.7041 175.4083 146.3590

5.5 4.4572 2.0048 29.1224 14.5612 80.0866 160.1732 146.3590

6 3.7453 1.4238 24.6136 12.3068 73.8408 147.6815 146.3590

6.5 3.1913 1.0414 21.1286 10.5643 68.6680 137.3360 146.3590

7 2.7517 0.7815 18.3875 9.1938 64.3564 128.7127 146.3590

7.5 2.3970 0.5998 16.2005 8.1003 60.7519 121.5038 146.3590

8 2.1067 0.4697 14.4351 7.2175 57.7403 115.4806 146.3590

8.5 1.8662 0.3746 12.9966 6.4983 55.2354 110.4708 146.3590

9 1.6646 0.3038 11.8158 5.9079 53.1713 106.3425 146.3590

9.5 1.4940 0.2502 10.8415 5.4207 51.4970 102.9939 146.3590

Page 44: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

29

10 1.3483 0.2090 10.0345 5.0173 50.1727 100.3454 146.3590

10.5 1.2230 0.1769 9.3652 4.6826 49.1673 98.3346 146.3590

11 1.1143 0.1516 8.8102 4.4051 48.4561 96.9121 146.3590

11.5 1.0195 0.1315 8.3512 4.1756 48.0196 96.0392 146.3590

12 0.9363 0.1153 7.9737 3.9869 47.8424 95.6849 146.3590

12.22 0.9029 0.1092 7.8304 3.9152 47.8434 95.6869 146.3590

12.5 0.8629 0.1022 7.6660 3.8330 47.9125 95.8251 146.3590

13 0.7978 0.0914 7.4185 3.7093 48.2204 96.4408 146.3590

13.5 0.7398 0.0825 7.2235 3.6118 48.7588 97.5175 146.3590

14 0.6879 0.0752 7.0746 3.5373 49.5220 99.0440 146.3590

14.5 0.6413 0.0690 6.9664 3.4832 50.5061 101.0121 146.3590

15 0.5993 0.0638 6.8944 3.4472 51.7081 103.4162 146.3590

15.5 0.5612 0.0594 6.8550 3.4275 53.1262 106.2524 146.3590

16 0.5267 0.0557 6.8449 3.4225 54.7595 109.5189 146.3590

16.5 0.4952 0.0525 6.8615 3.4308 56.6076 113.2152 146.3590

17 0.4665 0.0497 6.9025 3.4512 58.6710 117.3419 146.3590

17.5 0.4403 0.0474 6.9658 3.4829 60.9505 121.9010 146.3590

18 0.4161 0.0453 7.0497 3.5249 63.4476 126.8951 146.3590

18.5 0.3940 0.0435 7.1529 3.5764 66.1639 132.3278 146.3590

19 0.3735 0.0420 7.2739 3.6369 69.1017 138.2034 146.3590

19.5 0.3546 0.0406 7.4116 3.7058 72.2633 144.5266 146.3590

20 0.3371 0.0394 7.5651 3.7826 75.6514 151.3028 146.3590

20.5 0.3208 0.0383 7.7336 3.8668 79.2689 158.5379 146.3590

21 0.3057 0.0374 7.9161 3.9580 83.1190 166.2380 146.3590

21.5 0.2917 0.0365 8.1121 4.0560 87.2049 174.4099 146.3590

22 0.2786 0.0358 8.3209 4.1605 91.5301 183.0603 146.3590

22.5 0.2663 0.0351 8.5421 4.2710 96.0982 192.1964 146.3590

23 0.2549 0.0345 8.7750 4.3875 100.9129 201.8258 146.3590

23.5 0.2441 0.0340 9.0194 4.5097 105.9781 211.9562 146.3590

24 0.2341 0.0335 9.2748 4.6374 111.2976 222.5953 146.3590

24.5 0.2246 0.0331 9.5409 4.7704 116.8756 233.7513 146.3590

25 0.2157 0.0327 9.8173 4.9086 122.7162 245.4323 146.3590

25.5 0.2074 0.0324 10.1038 5.0519 128.8234 257.6468 146.3590

Page 45: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

30

26 0.1995 0.0320 10.4001 5.2001 135.2016 270.4033 146.3590

26.5 0.1920 0.0317 10.7061 5.3530 141.8552 283.7104 146.3590

27 0.1850 0.0315 11.0214 5.5107 148.7884 297.5768 146.3590

27.5 0.1783 0.0312 11.3459 5.6729 156.0057 312.0114 146.3590

28 0.1720 0.0310 11.6794 5.8397 163.5115 327.0230 146.3590

28.5 0.1660 0.0308 12.0218 6.0109 171.3104 342.6209 146.3590

29 0.1603 0.0306 12.3729 6.1864 179.4069 358.8139 146.3590

29.5 0.1549 0.0305 12.7326 6.3663 187.8056 375.6113 146.3590

30 0.1498 0.0303 13.1007 6.5504 196.5111 393.0222 146.3590

30.5 0.1449 0.0302 13.4772 6.7386 205.5280 411.0561 146.3590

31 0.1403 0.0300 13.8620 6.9310 214.8611 429.7221 146.3590

31.5 0.1359 0.0299 14.2549 7.1275 224.5149 449.0298 146.3590

32 0.1317 0.0298 14.6559 7.3279 234.4942 468.9884 146.3590

32.5 0.1277 0.0297 15.0648 7.5324 244.8038 489.6076 146.3590

33 0.1238 0.0296 15.4817 7.7409 255.4484 510.8967 146.3590

33.5 0.1201 0.0295 15.9064 7.9532 266.4327 532.8654 146.3590

34 0.1166 0.0294 16.3389 8.1695 277.7616 555.5232 146.3590

34.5 0.1133 0.0294 16.7791 8.3896 289.4399 578.8798 146.3590

35 0.1101 0.0293 17.2270 8.6135 301.4724 602.9447 146.3590

2.3.9 V-n Diagram

Figure 2.11 shows the flight envelope of the designed aircraft. Based on figure 2.11,

the flight envelope determines aerial platform operating limits for maximum speed and

load factor given a limited atmospheric density. The flight envelope is an area where

the aircraft can operate safely.

Page 46: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

31

Figure 2.11 Flight Envelope

Positive Load factory

𝑛𝑚𝑎𝑥𝑝𝑜𝑠 = 2.1 +24000

𝑊 + 10000= 2.1 +

24000

7.2752 + 10000= 4.498

Manoeuvre speed (Positive Limit)

𝑉𝐴 = √ 𝑛𝑚𝑎𝑥 𝑝𝑜𝑠𝑊

0.5ρSCLmax

𝑉𝐴 = √(4.498)(7.2753)

0.5(0.002377)(4.2195)(1.3)= 70.8489 𝑓𝑡/𝑠

Design Dive Speed

𝑉𝐷 = 1.4𝑉𝐶 𝑚𝑖𝑛

where 𝑉𝐶 𝑚𝑖𝑛 is cruising speed

𝑉𝐷 = 1.4(63.3202) = 88.6483 𝑓𝑡/𝑠

Maximum Negative Load factor

𝑛𝑚𝑎𝑥𝑛𝑒𝑔 = 0.4 𝑛𝑚𝑎𝑥𝑝𝑜𝑠 = 0.4(4.498) = 1.7992

-2

-1

0

1

2

3

4

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

18.

5

19.

5

n

V

V-n diagram

n(+) n(-)

Page 47: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

32

Manoeuvre speed (Negative Limit)

𝑉𝐺 = √ 𝑛𝑚𝑎𝑥 𝑛𝑒𝑔𝑊

0.5ρS(0.8)CLmax

𝑉𝐺 = √(1.7992 )(7.2753)

0.5(0.002377 )(4.2195)(0.8)(1.3)= 50.0978 𝑓𝑡/𝑠

For the curve part of the V-n diagram, the curve is drawn by varying airspeed

before manoeuvring speed with equation:

𝑛 =0.5ρ𝑉2𝑆CLmax

𝑊 (𝑓𝑜𝑟 𝑝𝑜𝑠𝑖𝑡𝑖𝑣𝑒 𝑉 − 𝑛)

For positive V-n region, airspeed varies from 0 to 88.6483 ft/s.

𝑛 =0.5ρ𝑉2𝑆(0.8CLmax)

𝑊 (𝑓𝑜𝑟 𝑛𝑒𝑔𝑎𝑡𝑖𝑣𝑒 𝑉 − 𝑛)

For negative V-n region, airspeed varies from 0 to 50.0978 ft/s.

Page 48: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

33

CHAPTER 3

AVIONICS AND CONTROL

3.1 CG Locations

An airplane in flight can be maneuvered by the pilot using the aerodynamic control

surfaces; the elevator, rudder, or ailerons. As the control surfaces change the amount

of force that each surface generates, the aircraft rotates about a point called the center of

gravity. The center of gravity is the average location of the weight of the aircraft. The weight

is actually distributed throughout the airplane, and for some problems it is important to know

the distribution. But for total aircraft maneuvering, we need to be concerned with only the total

weight and the location of the center of gravity.

The center of gravity (CG) of an aircraft is the point over which the aircraft would

balance. The center of gravity affects the stability of the aircraft. To ensure the aircraft is safe

to fly, the center of gravity must fall within specified limits.

Center of gravity (CG) is calculated as follows:

Determine the weights and arms of all mass within the aircraft.

Multiply weights by arms for all mass to calculate moments.

Add the moments of all mass together.

Divide the total moment by the total mass of the aircraft to give an overall arm.

The arm that results from this calculation must be within the center of gravity limits

dictated by the aircraft manufacturer. If it is not, weight in the aircraft must be removed, added

(rarely), or redistributed until the center of gravity falls within the prescribed limits.

Page 49: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

34

Aircraft center of gravity calculations are only performed along a single axis from the

zero point of the reference datum that represents the longitudinal axis of the aircraft (to

calculate fore-to-aft balance). The weight, moment and arm values of fixed items on the aircraft

do not change.

The plane is a combination of many parts; the wings, engines, fuselage, and tail, plus

the payload and the fuel. Each part has a weight associated with it which the engineer can

estimate, or calculate, using Newton's weight equation:

W = m * g

where W is the weight, m is the mass, and g is the gravitational constant which is 32.2

ft/square sec in English units and 9.8 meters/square sec in metric units. To determine the center

of gravity cg, we choose a reference location, or reference line. The cg is determined relative

to this reference location. The total weight of the aircraft is simply the sum of all the individua l

weights of the components.

Since the center of gravity is an average location of the weight, we can say that the

weight of the entire aircraft W times the location cg of the center of gravity is equal to the sum

of the weight w of each component times the distance d of that component from the reference

location:

𝑊 ∗ 𝑐𝑔 = [𝑊 ∗ 𝑑]𝑓𝑢𝑠𝑒𝑙𝑎𝑔𝑒 + [𝑊 ∗ 𝑑]𝑤𝑖𝑛𝑔 + [𝑊 ∗ 𝑑]𝑒𝑛𝑔𝑖𝑛𝑒𝑠 + ⋯

Therefore, the conclusion that the center of gravity is the mass-weighted average of the

component locations can be made.

We can generalize the technique discussed above. If we had a total of "n" discrete

components, the center of gravity cg of the aircraft times the weight W of the aircraft would be

the sum of the individual i component weight times the distance d from the reference line (w *

d) with the index i going from 1 to n. Mathematicians use the Greek letter sigma to denote this

addition. (Sigma is a zig-zag symbol with the index designation being placed below the bottom

Page 50: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

35

bar, the total number of additions placed over the top bar, and the variable to be summed placed

to the right of the sigma with each component designated by the index.)

𝑊 ∗ 𝑐𝑔 = ∑[𝑊 ∗ 𝑑]𝑖

𝑛

𝑖=1

This equation says that the center of gravity times the sum of "n" parts' weight is equal

to the sum of "n" parts' weight times their distance. The discrete equation works for "n" discrete

parts. As the location of the centre of gravity affects the stability of the aircraft, it must fall

within specified limits that are established. Both lateral and longitudinal balance are important,

but the primary concern is longitudinal balance which is the location of the CG along the

longitudinal or lengthwise axis.

Four important centre of gravity locations are determined for the analysis of balancing

and stability as shown below,

1. Maximum weight CG

2. Empty weight CG

3. Aft CG

4. Forward CG

The location of centre of gravity of each components and the calcuations of the four

centre of gravity locations are shown.

Page 51: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

36

Figure 3.1 CG for each components

3.1.1 Maximum weight CG

First and foremost, the weight and location of each component are estimated

and then the multiplication of the parameters are obtained as shown in table 3.1. After

that, the maximum weight CG is calculated by dividing the sum of calculated values

by the sum of weights of components. As a result, figure 3.2 shows the location of the

maximum weight CG of the aircraft.

Page 52: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

37

Table 3.1 Calculations for maximum weight CG of aircraft

No Items Weight(N) Distance(m) Weight*Distance

1 Wing 3.9981 0.3900 1.5593

2 Vertical tail 0.1962 0.9800 0.1923

3 Horizontal tail 0.0481 0.9800 0.0471

4 Fuselage 4.5097 0.5700 2.5705

5 Front landing gear 1.2469 0.2000 0.2494

6 Back landing gear 0.5346 0.8000 0.4277

7 Engine 0.7063 0.1000 0.0706

8 Battery 5.3465 0.2500 1.3366

9 Servo(aileron) 0.1766 0.4700 0.0830

10 Servo(rudder) 0.0883 0.9600 0.0848

11 Servo(elevator) 0.0883 1.0700 0.0945

12 Receiver 0.0343 0.1500 0.0051

13 Payload 4.9050 0.4500 2.2073

14 Propeller 0.1736 0.0000 0.0000

15 ESC 0.4218 0.1500 0.0633

Total(max) 22.4743 8.9914

CG location in horizontal, XCG = Ʃ𝑊𝑥

Ʃ𝑊=

8.9914

22.4743

= 0.4 m

Figure 3.2 Maximum CG

Page 53: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

38

3.1.2 Empty weight CG

First and foremost, the weight and location of each component that contributes

to empty weight of the aircraft are listed and then the multiplication of the parameters

are obtained as shown in table 3.2. After that, the empty weight CG is calculated by

dividing the sum of calculated values by the sum of weights of the components. As a

result, figure 3.3 shows the location of the empty weight CG of the aircraft.

Table 3.2 Calculations for empty weight CG of aircraft

No Items Weight(N) Distance(m) Weight*Distance

1 Wing 3.9981 0.3900 1.5593

2 Vertical tail 0.1962 0.9800 0.1923

3 Horizontal tail 0.0481 0.9800 0.0471

4 Fuselage 4.5097 0.5700 2.5705

5 Front landing gear 1.2469 0.2000 0.2494

6 Back landing gear 0.5346 0.8000 0.4277

7 Engine 0.7063 0.1000 0.0706

8 Battery 5.3465 0.2500 1.3366

9 Servo(aileron) 0.1766 0.4700 0.0830

10 Servo(rudder) 0.0883 0.9600 0.0848

11 Servo(elevator) 0.0883 1.0700 0.0945

12 Receiver 0.0343 0.1500 0.0051

13 Propeller 0.1736 0.0000 0.0000

14 ESC 0.4218 0.1500 0.0633

Total(max) 17.5693 6.7842

CG location in horizontal, XCG = Ʃ𝑊𝑥

Ʃ𝑊=

6.7842

17.5693

= 0.39 m

Page 54: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

39

Figure 3.3 Empty Weight CG

3.1.3 Forward CG

First and foremost, the weight and location of each component that located in

front of empty weight CG of the aircraft are listed and then the multiplication of the

parameters are obtained as shown in table 3.3. After that, the forward CG is calculated

by dividing the sum of calculated values by the sum of weights of the components. As

a result, figure 3.4 shows the location of the forward CG of the aircraft.

Table 3.3 Calculations for forward CG of aircraft

No Items Weight(N) Distance(m) Weight*Distance

1 Wing 3.9981 0.3900 1.5593

2 Vertical tail 0.1962 0.9800 0.1923

3 Horizontal tail 0.0481 0.9800 0.0471

4 Fuselage 4.5097 0.5700 2.5705

5 Front landing gear 1.2469 0.2000 0.2494

6 Back landing gear 0.5346 0.8000 0.4277

7 Engine 0.7063 0.1000 0.0706

8 Battery 5.3465 0.2500 1.3366

9 Servo(aileron) 0.1766 0.4700 0.0830

10 Servo(rudder) 0.0883 0.9600 0.0848

11 Servo(elevator) 0.0883 1.0700 0.0945

12 Receiver 0.0343 0.1500 0.0051

13 Payload 4.9050 0.4500 2.2073

14 Propeller 0.1736 0.0000 0.0000

15 ESC 0.4218 0.1500 0.0633

Total(max) 22.4743 8.9914

Page 55: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

40

CG location in horizontal, XCG = Ʃ𝑊𝑥

Ʃ𝑊=

8.9914

22.4743

= 0.4 m

Figure 3.4 Forward CG

3.1.4 Aft CG

First and foremost, the weight and location of each component that behind

empty weight CG of the aircraft are listed and then the multiplication of the parameters

are obtained as shown in table 3.4. After that, the aft CG is calculated by dividing the

sum of calculated values by the sum of weights of the components. As a result, figure

3.5 shows the location of the aft CG of the aircraft.

Page 56: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

41

Table 3.4 Calculations for aft CG of aircraft

No Items Weight(N) Distance(m) Weight*Distance

1 Wing 3.9981 0.3900 1.5593

2 Vertical tail 0.1962 0.9800 0.1923

3 Horizontal tail 0.0481 0.9800 0.0471

4 Fuselage 4.5097 0.5700 2.5705

5 Front landing gear 1.2469 0.2000 0.2494

6 Back landing gear 0.5346 0.8000 0.4277

7 Engine 0.7063 0.1000 0.0706

8 Battery 5.3465 0.2500 1.3366

9 Servo(aileron) 0.1766 0.4700 0.0830

10 Servo(rudder) 0.0883 0.9600 0.0848

11 Servo(elevator) 0.0883 1.0700 0.0945

12 Receiver 0.0343 0.1500 0.0051

13 Propeller 0.1736 0.0000 0.0000

14 ESC 0.4218 0.1500 0.0633

Total(max) 17.5693 6.7842

CG location in horizontal, XCG = Ʃ𝑊𝑥

Ʃ𝑊=

6.7842

17.5693

= 0.39 m

Figure 3.5 Aft CG

Page 57: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

42

3.2 Stability

3.2.1 Longitudinal Stability

3.2.1.1 Wing Section Lift-Curve Slope

The method used is basically a reference of Anon: Royal Aeronautical Society

Data sheets- Aerodynamics, Vol. II (Wings 01.01.06), 1955 according to DATCOM.

This method accounts for the development of the boundary layer for airfoils with

transition fixed at the leading edge and with maximum thickness less than

approximately 20%. The airfoil section lift curve slope at Mach numbers up to critical

Mach number is given by

𝑐𝑙α =1.05

β[

clα

(clα)theory](clα)theory

From appendix A, airfoil M15 with M < 0.15, then the value of 𝛽=0.99

[clα

(clα)theory] = empirical correction factor

From appendix B,

tan1

2∅′TE =

Y902

−Y99

29

From appendix A,

NACA M15 with M < 0.15, then the value of Y90

2 = 1.825 and

Y99

2 = 0.335

tan1

2∅′TE =

Y902

−Y99

29

= 1.825 − 0.335

9

= 0.16556

Page 58: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

43

From appendix B,

tan1

2∅′𝑇𝐸 = 0.16556, and Reynolds number of 6x106, Thus,

[clα

(clα)theory] = 0.78

The chord length is 0.28m, and for NACA M15, the thickness is 12% of the

chord length. Thus, the thickness is

𝑡 =12

100𝑥0.28 = 0.0336𝑚

From appendix C, Figure 4.1.1.2 – 8b,

For the thickness ratio, 𝑡

𝑐=

0.0336

0.28= 0.12, the value of (𝑐𝑙𝛼)ℎ𝑒𝑜𝑟𝑦 = 6.88 𝑝𝑒𝑟 𝑟𝑎𝑑

After we put all the value into the formula, we get,

𝑐𝑙α =1.05

β[

clα

(clα)theory] (clα)theory

𝑐𝑙α = 1.05

0.99(0.78)(6.88)

= 5.6916 𝑝𝑒𝑟 𝑟𝑎𝑑

= 0.0993 per deg

3.2.1.2 Wing Lift-Curve Slope

The wing lift curve slope can be calculated by using two methods which are

using the formula as written in the DATCOM book or using the graph in figure 4.1.3.2-

49 in DATCOM book. The formula is as follows:

Page 59: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

44

𝑐𝐿α

𝐴=

2𝜋

2 + √𝐴2β2

𝑘2 (1 +𝑡𝑎𝑛2Λ𝑐

2β2 ) + 4

The factor k is the ratio of the two-dimensional lift-curve slope (per radian) at

the appropriate Mach number to 2𝜋

𝛽 where,

𝑘 =𝑐𝑙𝛼(𝑝𝑒𝑟 𝑟𝑎𝑑)

2𝜋𝛽

= 5.6916

2𝜋0.99

= 0.8968

A= Aspect Ratio = 5

Based on the reference of DATCOM book, the value of sweep angle, Λ is zero

if the wing is a straight rectangular wing. Thus,

𝑐𝐿α

𝐴=

2𝜋

2 + √(52)(0.992 )

0.89682 (1 +𝑡𝑎𝑛200.992 ) + 4

= 0.7983 per rad

Therefore,

𝐶𝐿𝛼 = (𝐶𝐿𝛼

𝐴)(𝐴) = 0.7983𝑥5 = 3.9915 𝑝𝑒𝑟 𝑟𝑎𝑑 = 0.0697 𝑝𝑒𝑟 𝑑𝑒𝑔

3.2.1.3 Wing Pitching Moment

The low-speed zero- lift pitching moment for untwisted, constant section wings

with elliptical loading may be approximated by

Page 60: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

45

(C𝑚𝑜)(θ=0) =𝐴𝑐𝑜𝑠2Λ𝑐/4

𝐴 + 2𝑐𝑜𝑠Λ𝑐/4C𝑚𝑜

where, C𝑚𝑜 = section pitching-moment coefficient at zero lift. From the airfoil

information,

C𝑚𝑜 = −0.072

Thus, the equation 3.6 can be simplified as

(C𝑚𝑜)(θ=0) =𝐴

𝐴 + 2C𝑚𝑜

= 5

5 + 2(−0.072)

= −0.0514

3.2.1.4 Wing-Body Lift-Curve Slope

According US DATCOM Section 4.3.1.2, the equation for wing-body lift-

curve slope based on the total projected wing area, including that intercepted by the

fuselage is

(𝐶𝐿𝛼)𝑊𝐵 = [𝐾𝑁 + 𝐾𝑊(𝐵) + 𝐾𝐵(𝑊) ](𝐶𝐿𝛼)𝑒

𝑆𝑒

𝑆𝑤

where,

𝐾𝑁 is the ratios of the nose lift

𝐾𝑊(𝐵) is the wing lift in the presence of the body

𝐾𝐵(𝑊) is the body lift in the presence of the wing respectively, to the wing –

alone lift

𝑆𝑒 is exposed wing area

𝑆𝑤 is total projected wing area

(𝐶𝐿𝛼)𝑒 is lift-curve slope of exposed wing based on exposed wing area and

exposed aspect ratio

Page 61: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

46

Calculations:

𝑑

𝑏=

0.1

1.4= 0.0714

where,

𝑑 = fuselage diameter

𝑏 = wingspan

From appendix D, using the 𝑑

𝑏 =0.0714 value, we obtained the value of

𝐾𝑊(𝐵) = 1.07, 𝐾𝐵(𝑊) = 0.1

From previous calculation, (𝐶𝐿𝛼)𝑒 = 0.0697 per deg, 3.9915 per rad

𝑆𝑒

𝑆𝑤=

0.3354

0.392= 0.8556

where,

From Solidworks, 𝑆𝑤𝑒𝑡 = 0.684𝑚2

𝑆𝑤𝑒𝑡 = 𝑆𝑒[1.977 + 0.52 (𝑡

𝑐)] , 𝑓𝑜𝑟

𝑡

𝑐> 0.05

0.684 = 𝑆𝑒[1.977 + 0.52(0.12)]

𝑆𝑒 = 0.3354𝑚2

𝑆𝑤 = reference area = 0.392 𝑚2

𝐾𝑁 =(𝐶𝐿𝛼

)𝑁𝑆𝑁𝑟𝑒𝑓

(𝐶𝐿𝛼)𝑒𝑆𝑒

=(0.0349)(7.854 × 10−3)

(0.0697)(0.3354)

= 0.0117

where,

Page 62: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

47

(𝐶𝐿𝛼)𝑁 is nose lift-curve slope, usually used 2 per rad = 0.0349 per deg

𝑆𝑁𝑟𝑒𝑓 is reference area for nose lift-curve slope, usually 𝜋𝑟2 = 𝜋(0.1

2)2 =

7.854 × 10−3𝑚2

(𝐶𝐿𝛼)𝑊𝐵 = [𝐾𝑁 + 𝐾𝑊(𝐵) + 𝐾𝐵(𝑊) ](𝐶𝐿𝛼)𝑒𝑆𝑒

𝑆𝑤

= [0.0117 + 1.07 + 0.1](3.9915)(0.8556)

= 4.0357 per rad = 0.0704 per deg

3.2.1.5 Downwash Gradient

(𝜕𝜖̅

𝜕𝛼) = 4.44[𝐾𝐴 𝐾𝜆 𝐾𝐻 (cos 𝛬𝑐/4)1/2]1.19

2ℎ𝐻

𝑏=

2(0)

1.4= 0

2𝑙𝐻

𝑏=

2(0.6525)

1.4= 0.9321

From appendix E,

𝐾𝐻 = 1.06

KA =1

𝐴−

1

1 + 𝐴1.7

=1

5−

1

1 + 51.7

= 0.1391

𝐾𝜆 =10 − 3𝜆

7

=10 − 3(0)

7

= 1.4286

Therefore,

(𝜕𝜖̅

𝜕𝛼) = 4.44 [0.1391(1.4286)(1.06)(cos0)

12]

1.19

= 0.6957 𝑝𝑒𝑟 𝑑𝑒𝑔

Page 63: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

48

3.2.1.6 Tail Section Lift-Curve

𝑐𝑙α =1.05

β[

clα

(clα)theory](clα)theory

From appendix A, NACA 0012 with M < 0.15, then the value of 𝛽=0.99

[clα

(clα)theory] = empirical correction factor

From appendix B,

tan1

2∅′TE =

Y902

−Y99

29

From appendic A, NACA 0012 with M < 0.15, then the value of Y90

2 = 1.448

and Y99

2 = 0.260

tan1

2∅′TE =

Y902

−Y99

29

= 1.448 − 0.260

9

= 0.132

From appendix B,

tan1

2∅′𝑇𝐸 = 0.132, and Reynolds number of 3x106,

Thus,

[clα

(clα)theory] = 0.76

The chord length is 0.28m, and for NACA 0012, the thickness is 12% of the

chord length. Thus, the thickness is

𝑡 =12

100𝑥0.21 = 0.0252𝑚

Page 64: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

49

From appendix C, for the thickness ratio, 𝑡

𝑐=

0.0252

0.21= 0.12, the value of

(𝑐𝑙𝛼)ℎ𝑒𝑜𝑟𝑦 = 6.88 𝑝𝑒𝑟 𝑟𝑎𝑑. After we put all the value into the formula, we get:

𝑐𝑙α =1.05

β[

clα

(clα)theory] (clα)theory

𝑐𝑙α = 1.05

0.99(0.76)(6.88)

= 5.5457 𝑝𝑒𝑟 𝑟𝑎𝑑

= 0.0968 per deg

3.2.1.7 Tail Lift Curve Slope

𝑐𝐿α

𝐴=

2𝜋

2 + √𝐴2β2

𝑘2 (1 +𝑡𝑎𝑛2Λ𝑐

2β2 ) + 4

The factor k is the ratio of the two-dimensional lift-curve slope (per radian) at

the appropriate Mach number to 2𝜋

𝛽 where,

𝑘 =𝑐𝑙𝛼(𝑝𝑒𝑟 𝑟𝑎𝑑)

2𝜋𝛽

= 5.5457

2𝜋0.99

= 0.8738

A= Aspect Ratio = 2.86

Based on the reference of DATCOM book, the value of sweep angle, Λ is zero

if the wing is a straight rectangular wing. Thus,

𝑐𝐿α

𝐴=

2𝜋

2 + √(2.862)(0.992)

0.87382 (1 +𝑡𝑎𝑛200.992 ) + 4

= 1.0818 per rad

Page 65: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

50

Therefore,

𝐶𝐿𝛼 = (𝐶𝐿𝛼

𝐴)(𝐴) = 1.0818𝑥2.86 = 3.9039 𝑝𝑒𝑟 𝑟𝑎𝑑 = 0.054 𝑝𝑒𝑟 𝑑𝑒𝑔

3.2.1.8 Maximum Angle of Attack

For untwisted, constant section wings zero lift angle of attack based on

DATCOM book is:

(α0)(θ=0) = α𝑖 −𝑐𝑙𝑖

𝑐𝑙α

where,

𝑐𝑙𝑖 = section design lift coefficient

α𝑖 = angle of attack for design lift coefficient

𝑐𝑙α = section lift-curve slope

From appendix F,

𝑐𝑙𝑖 = 0.76𝑥4

6= 0.5067 𝑝𝑒𝑟 𝑑𝑒𝑔

α𝑖 = 0.74𝑥4

6= 0.4933 𝑑𝑒𝑔

And from section 2.2.1.1,

𝑐𝑙α = 0.0993 𝑝𝑒𝑟 𝑑𝑒𝑔

Therefore,

(α0)(θ=0) = 0.4933 −0.5067

0.105

= −4.3324 𝑑𝑒𝑔

Page 66: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

51

From appendix G in DATCOM book,

For Λ𝐿𝐸=0 ,

𝐶𝐿𝑚𝑎𝑥

𝐶𝑙𝑚𝑎𝑥= 0.9

From airfoil information,

CLmax = 1.3308

From appendix H,

ΔCLmax =−0.1

𝑇𝑜𝑡𝑎𝑙 CLmax =1.3308−0.1

=1.2308

From appendix I,

For Λ𝐿𝐸 = 0 and M < 0.15,

ΔCLmax = 0

𝐶𝐿𝑚𝑎𝑥 = (𝐶𝐿𝑚𝑎𝑥

𝐶𝑙𝑚𝑎𝑥

)𝐶𝑙𝑚𝑎𝑥 + Δ𝐶𝐿𝑚𝑎𝑥

= (0.9)(1.2308) + 0

= 1.1077 𝑝𝑒𝑟 𝑑𝑒𝑔

From appendix J,

ΔαCLmax = 2.10

Therefore, maximum angle of attack is

Page 67: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

52

𝛼𝐶𝐿𝑚𝑎𝑥 =𝐶𝐿𝑚𝑎𝑥

𝐶𝐿𝛼+ 𝛼0 + Δ𝛼𝐶𝐿𝑚𝑎𝑥

=1.1077

0.0697 + (−4.3324) + 2.1

= 13.66 deg

3.2.1.9 Calculation for Equation of Longitudinal Static Stability

Slope of moment coefficient curve

In Anderson’s book,

𝜕𝐶𝑀,𝑐𝑔

𝜕𝛼= 𝑎 [ℎ − ℎ𝑎𝑐𝑤𝑏

− 𝑉𝐻

𝑎𝑡

𝑎(1 −

𝜕𝜀

𝜕𝛼)]

where in our case,

𝑎 = 𝑤𝑖𝑛𝑔 𝑏𝑜𝑑𝑦 𝑙𝑖𝑓𝑡 𝑐𝑢𝑟𝑣𝑒 𝑠𝑙𝑜𝑝𝑒 = 0.0704 𝑝𝑒𝑟 𝑑𝑒𝑔

ℎ = 𝑙𝑜𝑐𝑎𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛 𝑜𝑓 𝑐𝑒𝑛𝑡𝑟𝑒 𝑜𝑓 𝑔𝑟𝑎𝑣𝑖𝑡𝑦

ℎ𝑎𝑐𝑤𝑏= 𝑙𝑜𝑐𝑎𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛 𝑜𝑓 𝑤𝑖𝑛𝑔 𝑏𝑜𝑑𝑦 𝑎𝑒𝑟𝑜𝑑𝑦𝑛𝑎𝑚𝑖𝑐 𝑐𝑒𝑛𝑡𝑟𝑒 = 0.39 𝑚

𝑉𝐻 = 𝑡𝑎𝑖𝑙 𝑣𝑜𝑙𝑢𝑚𝑒 𝑟𝑎𝑡𝑖𝑜 = 0.5

𝑎𝑡 = 𝑡𝑎𝑖𝑙 𝑙𝑖𝑓𝑡 𝑐𝑢𝑟𝑣𝑒 𝑠𝑙𝑜𝑝𝑒 = 0.054 𝑝𝑒𝑟 𝑑𝑒𝑔

𝜕𝜀

𝜕𝛼= 0.6957

Therefore,

i. Empty Weight Centre of Gravity

ℎ = 0.39 𝑚

𝜕𝐶𝑀,𝑐𝑔

𝜕𝛼= 0.0704 [0.39 − 0.39 − 0.5

0.054

0.0704(1 − 0.6957)]

𝜕𝐶𝑀,𝑐𝑔

𝜕𝛼= −0.00822

Page 68: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

53

ii. Gross Weight Centre of Gravity

ℎ = 0.4 𝑚

𝜕𝐶𝑀,𝑐𝑔

𝜕𝛼= 0.0704 [0.4 − 0.39 − 0.5

0.054

0.0704(1 − 0.6957)]

𝜕𝐶𝑀,𝑐𝑔

𝜕𝛼= −0.00751

iii. Forward Centre of Gravity

ℎ = 0.4 𝑚

𝜕𝐶𝑀,𝑐𝑔

𝜕𝛼= 0.0704 [0.4 − 0.39 − 0.5

0.054

0.0704(1 − 0.6957)]

𝜕𝐶𝑀,𝑐𝑔

𝜕𝛼= −0.00751

iv. Aft Centre of Gravity

ℎ = 0.39 𝑚

𝜕𝐶𝑀,𝑐𝑔

𝜕𝛼= 0.0704 [0.39 − 0.39 − 0.5

0.054

0.0704(1 − 0.6957)]

𝜕𝐶𝑀,𝑐𝑔

𝜕𝛼= −0.00822

Moment coefficient at zero angle of attack

𝐶𝑀,0 = 𝐶𝑀,𝑎𝑐𝑤𝑏+ 𝑉𝐻𝑎𝑡(𝑖𝑡 + 𝜀0)

where in our case,

𝐶𝑀,𝑎𝑐𝑤𝑏= 𝑚𝑜𝑚𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑐𝑜𝑒𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑖𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑎𝑡 𝑤𝑖𝑛𝑔 𝑏𝑜𝑑𝑦 𝑎𝑒𝑟𝑜𝑑𝑦𝑛𝑎𝑚𝑖𝑐 𝑐𝑒𝑛𝑡𝑟𝑒 = −0.0514

𝑉𝐻 = 𝑡𝑎𝑖𝑙 𝑣𝑜𝑙𝑢𝑚𝑒 𝑟𝑎𝑡𝑖𝑜 = 0.5

𝑎𝑡 = 𝑡𝑎𝑖𝑙 𝑙𝑖𝑓𝑡 𝑐𝑢𝑟𝑣𝑒 𝑠𝑙𝑜𝑝𝑒 = 0.054 𝑝𝑒𝑟 𝑑𝑒𝑔

𝑖𝑡 = 𝑡𝑎𝑖𝑙 𝑠𝑒𝑡𝑡𝑖𝑛𝑔 𝑎𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒 = 2.7

𝜀0 = 𝑑𝑜𝑤𝑛𝑤𝑎𝑠ℎ 𝑎𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒 𝑎𝑡 𝑧𝑒𝑟𝑜 𝑙𝑖𝑓𝑡 = 0

Therefore,

Page 69: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

54

𝐶𝑀,0 = −0.0514 + 0.5(0.054)(2.7 + 0)

𝐶𝑀,0 = 0.0215

From the calculation of last two sections, all of the slope of the pitching

moment coefficient curve is negative and the 𝐶𝑀,𝑐𝑔 is positive. Hence, the aircraft

model is statically stable.

Total pitching moment about centre of gravity

Assuming linear curve for the moment coefficient versus alpha graph,

𝐶𝑀,𝑐𝑔 =𝜕𝐶𝑀,𝑐𝑔

𝜕𝛼𝛼 + 𝐶𝑀,0

Therefore,

i. Gross Weight Centre of Gravity

𝐶𝑀,𝑐𝑔 = −0.00751𝛼 + 0.0215

Table 3.5 Total pitching moment coefficient of gross weight CG with various angle

of attack

Angle () 𝑪𝑴,𝒄𝒈

0 0.0215

2 0.0065

4 -0.0085

6 -0.0236

8 -0.0386

10 -0.0536

12 -0.0686

14 -0.0837

16 -0.0987

Page 70: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

55

The moment coefficient curve is displayed in Figure 3.6.

Figure 3.6 Moment coefficient versus angle of attack for gross weight CG

Equilibrium angle of attack is obtained from,

0 = −0.00751𝛼𝑒 + 0.0215

𝛼𝑒 = 2.8628° (trim angle)

ii. Empty Weight Centre of Gravity

𝐶𝑀,𝑐𝑔 = −0.00822𝛼 + 0.0215

Table 3.6 Total pitching moment coefficient of empty weight CG with various angle

of attack

Angle () 𝑪𝑴,𝒄𝒈

0 0.0215

2 0.0051

4 -0.0114

6 -0.0278

8 -0.0442

10 -0.0607

12 -0.0771

14 -0.0935

16 -0.1100

-0.12

-0.1

-0.08

-0.06

-0.04

-0.02

0

0.02

0.04

0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16

Mo

men

t Co

effc

ien

t

Angle of Attack

Moment coefficient versus Angle of Attack for Gross Weight Centre of Gravity

Page 71: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

56

The moment coefficient curve is displayed in Figure 3.7.

Figure 3.7 Moment coefficient versus angle of attack for empty weight CG

Equilibrium angle of attack is obtained from,

0 = −0.00822 𝛼𝑒 + 0.0215

𝛼𝑒 = 2.6156° (trim angle)

iii. Forward Centre of Gravity

𝐶𝑀,𝑐𝑔 = −0.00751𝛼 + 0.0215

Table 3.7 Total pitching moment coefficient of forward CG with various angle of

attack

Angle () 𝑪𝑴,𝒄𝒈

0 0.0215

2 0.0065

4 -0.0085

6 -0.0236

8 -0.0386

10 -0.0536

12 -0.0686

14 -0.0837

16 -0.0987

-0.12

-0.1

-0.08

-0.06

-0.04

-0.02

0

0.02

0.04

0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16

Mo

men

t Co

effi

cien

t

Angle of Attack

Moment coefficient versus Angle of Attack for Empty Weight Centre of Gravity

Page 72: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

57

The moment coefficient curve is displayed in Figure 3.8.

Figure 3.8 Moment coefficient versus angle of attack for forward CG

Equilibrium angle of attack is obtained from,

0 = −0.00751𝛼𝑒 + 0.0215

𝛼𝑒 = 2.8628° (trim angle)

iv. Aft Centre of Gravity

𝐶𝑀,𝑐𝑔 = −0.00822𝛼 + 0.0215

Table 3.8 Total pitching moment coefficient of aft CG with various angle of attack

Angle () 𝑪𝑴,𝒄𝒈

0 0.0215

2 0.0051

4 -0.0114

6 -0.0278

8 -0.0442

10 -0.0607

12 -0.0771

14 -0.0935

16 -0.1100

-0.12

-0.1

-0.08

-0.06

-0.04

-0.02

0

0.02

0.04

0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16

Mo

men

t Co

effc

ien

t

Angle of Attack

Moment coefficient versus Angle of Attack for Forward Centre of Gravity

Page 73: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

58

The moment coefficient curve is displayed in Figure 3.9.

Figure 3.9 Moment coefficient versus angle of attack for aft CG

Equilibrium angle of attack is obtained from,

0 = −0.00822 𝛼𝑒 + 0.0215

𝛼𝑒 = 2.6156° (trim angle)

Apparently, the angle of attack falls within the reasonable flight range, 𝛼𝑚𝑖𝑛 ≤

𝛼𝑒 ≤ 𝛼𝑚𝑎𝑥 (13.66˚). Therefore, the aircraft is longitudinally balanced as well as

statically stable.

Calculation for Neutral Point

ℎ𝑛 = ℎ𝑎𝑐,𝑤𝑏 + 𝑉𝐻

𝑎𝑡

𝑎(1 −

𝜕𝜀

𝜕𝛼)

where in our case,

ℎ𝑎𝑐𝑤𝑏= 𝑙𝑜𝑐𝑎𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛 𝑜𝑓 𝑤𝑖𝑛𝑔 𝑏𝑜𝑑𝑦 𝑎𝑒𝑟𝑜𝑑𝑦𝑛𝑎𝑚𝑖𝑐 𝑐𝑒𝑛𝑡𝑟𝑒 = 0.39 𝑚

𝑉𝐻 = 𝑡𝑎𝑖𝑙 𝑣𝑜𝑙𝑢𝑚𝑒 𝑟𝑎𝑡𝑖𝑜 = 0.5

𝑎𝑡 = 𝑡𝑎𝑖𝑙 𝑙𝑖𝑓𝑡 𝑐𝑢𝑟𝑣𝑒 𝑠𝑙𝑜𝑝𝑒 = 0.054 𝑝𝑒𝑟 𝑑𝑒𝑔

𝑎 = 𝑤𝑖𝑛𝑔 𝑏𝑜𝑑𝑦 𝑙𝑖𝑓𝑡 𝑐𝑢𝑟𝑣𝑒 𝑠𝑙𝑜𝑝𝑒 = 0.0704 𝑝𝑒𝑟 𝑑𝑒𝑔

𝜕𝜀

𝜕𝛼= 0.6957

-0.12

-0.1

-0.08

-0.06

-0.04

-0.02

0

0.02

0.04

0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16

Mo

men

t Co

effi

cien

t

Angle of Attack

Moment coefficient versus Angle of Attack for Aft Centre of Gravity

Page 74: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

59

Therefore,

ℎ𝑛 = 0.39 + 0.50.054

0.0704(1 − 0.6957)

ℎ𝑛 = 0.5067 𝑚

Calculation for Static Margin

𝑆𝑡𝑎𝑡𝑖𝑐 𝑀𝑎𝑟𝑔𝑖𝑛 = ℎ𝑛 − ℎ

Therefore,

i. Empty Weight Centre of Gravity

ℎ = 0.39 𝑚

𝑆𝑡𝑎𝑡𝑖𝑐 𝑀𝑎𝑟𝑔𝑖𝑛 = 0.5067 − 0.39

𝑆𝑡𝑎𝑡𝑖𝑐 𝑀𝑎𝑟𝑔𝑖𝑛 = 0.1167 𝑚

ii. Gross Weight Centre of Gravity

ℎ = 0.4 𝑚

𝑆𝑡𝑎𝑡𝑖𝑐 𝑀𝑎𝑟𝑔𝑖𝑛 = 0.5067 − 0.4

𝑆𝑡𝑎𝑡𝑖𝑐 𝑀𝑎𝑟𝑔𝑖𝑛 = 0.1067 𝑚

iii. Forward Centre of Gravity

ℎ = 0.4 𝑚

𝑆𝑡𝑎𝑡𝑖𝑐 𝑀𝑎𝑟𝑔𝑖𝑛 = 0.5067 − 0.4

𝑆𝑡𝑎𝑡𝑖𝑐 𝑀𝑎𝑟𝑔𝑖𝑛 = 0.1067 𝑚

iv. Aft Centre of Gravity

ℎ = 0.39 𝑚

𝑆𝑡𝑎𝑡𝑖𝑐 𝑀𝑎𝑟𝑔𝑖𝑛 = 0.5067 − 0.39

𝑆𝑡𝑎𝑡𝑖𝑐 𝑀𝑎𝑟𝑔𝑖𝑛 = 0.1167 𝑚

Page 75: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

60

From the calculation of static margin, the value is positive in all centre of

gravity. Hence, the aircraft is statically stable .

3.2.2 Lateral Stability

Lateral stability is the stability about the airplane's longitudinal axis, which

extends form nose to tail. This helps to stabilize the lateral or rolling effect when one

wing gets lower than the wing on the opposite side of the airplane. There are four main

design factors which make an airplane stable laterally - dihedral, keel effect,

sweepback, and weight distribution.

The static lateral stability of an aircraft involves consideration of rolling

moments due to sideslip. If an aircraft has favorable rolling moment due to a sideslip,

a lateral displacement from wing level flight produces a sideslip, and the sideslip

creates a rolling moment tending to return the aircraft to wing level flight. By this

action, static lateral stability will be evident. Of course, a sideslip will produce yawing

moments depending on the nature of the static directional stability, but the

consideration of static lateral stability will involve only the relationship of rolling

moments and sideslip.

The axis system of an aircraft defines a positive rolling as a moment about the

longitudinal axis which tends to rotate the right wing down. As in other aerodynamic

considerations, it is convenient to consider rolling moments in the coefficient form so

that lateral stability can be evaluated independent of weight, altitude, speeds, etc.

The sideslip angle relates the displacement of the aircraft centre line from the

relative airflow. Sideslip angle is provided the symbol β (beta) and is positive when

the relative wind is displaced to the right of the aircraft centre line as shown in the

figure. The sideslip angle, β, is essentially the “directional angle of attack” of the

aircraft and is the primary reference in directional stability as well as lateral stability

considerations.

Page 76: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

61

Figure 3.10 Positive sideslip angle

The principal surface contributing to the lateral stability of an aircraft is the

wing. The effect of geometric dihedral is a powerful contribution to lateral stability.

Dihedral angle is the angle between the plane of each wing and the horizontal when

the aircraft is level. Wing position also greatly effects the lateral static stability. A high

wing location gives a stable contribution. The direction of relative airflow increases

the effective angle of attack of the wing into wind and decreases the effective angle of

attack of the wing out of wind, tending to decrease the rolling moment. Therefore, a

high wing position usually requires no geometric dihedral. In our case, the RC aircraft

uses a high wing and there is no dihedral angle.

The rolling moment derivatives due to the side slip is given as:

𝑐𝑙𝛽 = (𝑐𝑙𝛽

𝜃)𝜃 + Δ𝑐𝑙𝛽

The wing tip shapes are shown in figure 3.11.

Figure 3.11 Shape of wing tips

Page 77: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

62

Since the chosen Δ𝑐𝑙𝛽 =−0.0002

𝑟𝑎𝑑 and dihedral, 𝜃 = 0,

𝑐𝑙𝛽 = (𝑐𝑙𝛽

𝜃)𝜃 + Δ𝑐𝑙𝛽

𝑐𝑙𝛽 = 0 +−0.0002

𝑟𝑎𝑑

𝑐𝑙𝛽 = −0.0002/𝑟𝑎𝑑

Static lateral stability can be illustrated by a graph of rolling moment

coefficient, Cl, versus sideslip angle, β. Clβ is the slope of the graph.

The equation of the graph is as followed,

𝑦 = −0.0002𝑥

The graph is plotted based on the equation as shown in figure.

Figure 3.12 Graph of rolling moment versus sideslip angle

From figure 3.12, it can be said that the aircraft laterally stable. When the

aircraft is subjected to positive sideslip angle, lateral stability is evident when negative

rolling moment coefficient results. Thus, when the relative airflow comes from the

right (+β), a rolling moment to the left (-Cl) will be created which tends to roll the

airplane to the left. Lateral stability exist when the curve of Cl versus β has a negative

slope and the degree of stability will be a function of the slope of this curve.

Page 78: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

63

3.3 Communication Signals (Transmitter-Receiver)

3.3.1 Transmitter

There are a few elements in a radio transmitter to generate radio waves that

consists of information for examples audio, video or digital data. First and foremost,

required electrical power for the operation of transmitter is supplied by battery. After

that, alternating current at transmitting frequency will be created by oscillator. The

carrier wave (generated wave) usually is a sine wave. Then, some useful information

is added to the carrier wave by modulator. This information adding process can be

done by two methods, which are amplitude modulation (AM) and frequency

modulation (FM). The amplitude of the carrier wave is slightly modified if AM is

applied whereas application of FM modifies the frequency of the carrier wave. The

power of the carrier wave is increased by amplifying the wave with amplifier. In short,

powerfulness of the broadcast depends on the power of amplitude. Last but not least,

the amplitude signal is converted to radio waves. Figure 3.13 shows the block diagram

of radio transmitter.

Figure 3.13 Block diagram of radio transmitter [4]

Page 79: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

64

3.3.1.1 Specifications of Transmitter

Band Type and Frequency Range

Basically, there are two major band types, that is, Citizen Band (CB) and

Independent, Scientific, Medical (ISM) band. Some fixed frequencies that range from

27MHz to 75MHz are included in the CB band. However, the frequency band is

localized. In other words, the frequency band is different from countries. For example,

model aircraft usually has 72MHz frequency band with 50 channels (11-60) in USA

whereas model aircraft in most European countries has 35MHz frequency band with

36 channels (55-90) [5], [6].

Nowadays, most of the RC hobbyist use ISM 2.4GHz band. The frequency

range in this band is between 2.4000GHz to 2.4835GHz. The main advantage of using

this frequency band is frequency hopping spread spectrum (FHSS) is used. The system

allows the transmitted frequency to jump between whole range of different channels.

In this case, data transmission occurs when both of the transmitter and receiver hop to

a common random sequence of frequencies. As a result, one or more packets of data

are transmitted between each hop. Figure 3.14 shows spectrum graph analysis of some

common ISM systems.

Page 80: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

65

Figure 3.14 Spectrum graph analysis of some common ISM systems

Channels

Generally, channel is referring to each separate controllable function of an

airplane. A typical aircraft consists of 4 channels, which is, aileron, elevator, rudder

and throttle. However, a complex RC airplane may require more channels that control

flaps, retractable landing gear and so on. Usually, the channels are controlled by

switches as shown in figure 3.15. At the same time, table 3.9 shows two major channel

sequences of primary control of RC airplane for transmitter and receiver.

Page 81: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

66

Figure 3.15 Components of transmitter

Table 3.9 Major sequence of channels

No Sequence Protocol Channel Control

1 TAER Spektrum

1 Throttle (THR)

2 Aileron (AIL)

3 Elevator (ELE)

4 Rudder (RUD)

2 AETR Futaba

1 Aileron (AIL)

2 Elevator (ELE)

3 Throttle (THR)

4 Rudder (RUD)

Modes

Generally, there are four modes in the transmitter as shown in figure 3.16.

However, most of the transmitter are using modes 1 and 2. In our case, mode 2 is used

due to it is most commonly used so that the pilot can get used to the mode easily.

Antenna

Channel

switches

Display

Main

on/off

switch

Control

sticks

Trims

Page 82: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

67

Figure 3.16 Transmitter modes

3.3.1.2 Chosen Transmitter

In our case, FrSky Taranis Q X7 with 2.4GHz frequency transmitter is used.

Figure 3.17 displays the transmitter chosen.

Figure 3.17 FrSky Taranis Q X7 transmitter

Advantages and Disadvantages of Chosen Band Type

This transmitter has a frequency band of 2.4GHz. This frequency band is

chosen mainly due to the application of “frequency hopping” that replacing the “crystal”

technology which consisted of the MHz systems. As a result, the RC airplane can be

operated in more frequencies. At the same time, the frequency band produces a lower

interference. This is because the frequencies of any sorts of noise are automatically

separated by the radio. Besides, it provides a higher performance level as more

responsive control is offered as compared to 35MHz system. This is mainly due to its

high data rate. The 2.4GHz system consumes much lesser power consumption than

Page 83: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

68

35MHz system. For example, for the control range up to 250m, about 4MW of power

is consumed in 2.4GHz system whereas 35MHz system consumes 759MW of power.

Last but not least, it requires a smaller antenna. In other words, the length of antenna

required on the receiver is only 3cm.

However, there are some disadvantages of using the frequency band. For

example, it is more susceptible to bad installations such as weak batteries. Besides, it

is considered as a free-for-all band as various of other things such as Wi-Fi, wireless

video senders and other data-links are shared in the band. Using 2.4GHz system causes

a higher cost as compared to 35MHz system.

Channels

A total of 16 channels can be assigned with this transmitter. The locations of

switches A, B, C, D, F and H are shown in figure 3.18. There are 3 positions in switches

A, B, C and D whereas switches F and H possesses 2 positions per switch. Therefore,

the conclusion that this transmitter has enough channels for our flight testing.

Figure 3.18 Channel switches of transmitter

In our flight testing, only four channels are used, which are, throttle, aileron,

elevator and rudder, to complete the primary control of the airplane. The sequence of

the channels included is AETR, which is the Futaba protocol. In this case, the assigned

channels are depicted in table 3.10.

SA SB

SF

SD SC

SH

Page 84: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

69

Table 3.10 Assigned channels of transmitter

No Control Switch Position

1 Aileron SB

1

2 Elevator 2

3 Throttle SC

1

4 Rudder 2

Operation

The power required for operation of transmitter is supplied by battery. The

battery comes in a few options, which is NiMH and LiPo battery. The operation

specifications of the transmitter are stated in table 3.11.

Table 3.11 Operation specifications of transmitter

No Specifications Values

1 Operating voltage 6 to 15 V

2 Operating current 210 mA maximum

3 Output power 60 mW

From the table, the operating voltage indicates that 2 or 3 cells LiPo batteries

are accepted. This is because operating voltage of 2S and 3S LiPo batteries indicates

7.4V and 11.1V. At the same time, the operating current is essential when connecting

to external module such as XJT, DJT and R9M. Moreover, the output power indicates

the actual power of a radio frequency (RF) that produces by the transmitter.

Features

First and foremost, the transmitter has quad ball bearing gimbals instead of hall

sensors as control sticks. They provide a smooth feeling to the pilot when moving the

sticks. At the same time, it possesses the audio speech outputs. This means that the

values, alarms and setting such as changing mode can be heard by the pilot to ease the

flight testing process. Moreover, its full telemetry capability allows the pilot to access

to the real-time flight data easily such as battery voltage reading whereas Receiver

Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI) alert helps pilot to eliminate the problems of lost

Page 85: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

70

connection between transmitter and receiver by monitoring the reception quality of

signals continuously and producing alert before the quality becomes critical. The super

low latency in the transmitter ensures the data messages are transmitter with minimal

delay to minimize the probability of crashing the airplane. Furthermore, the transmitter

alerts the pilot if there is too much vibration as it may affect the stability of the airplane.

Last but not least, the OpenTx firmware that allows editing settings and running radio

simulations is installed in the transmitter.

TX Protocol

The system used in FrSky is Advanced Continuous Channel Shifting

Technology (ACCST). Basically, this system allows the frequency to be shifted

hundreds of times per second. As a result, signal conflicts and interruptions are not

involved in this system. In other words, the system has a robust frequency agility.

Figure 3.19 shows the spectrum analysis of the system. From the figure, around 50

different frequencies are switched between a pseudo-random basis.

Figure 3.19 Spectrum analysis of ACCST system

Generally, the transmitter is able to compatible with FrSky X series, D series

and V8-II series receiver. Besides, the compatible receivers may be increase if an

external module is used. At the same time, there are three RF modes that supported by

the transmitter. Table 3.12 shows the mode of RF of the transmitter. At the same time,

Page 86: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

71

the table states the receivers that are compatible and number of output channels. In this

case, the RF mode is set as D8 due to the receiver used is in V8-II series.

Table 3.12 RF modes of transmitter

No Mode Compatible Receivers Number of Output Channels

1 D8 V8-II series in D mode, D series 8

2 D16 X series Up to 16

3 LR12 L series 12

3.3.2 Receiver (RX)

On the other hand, radio receiver can be considered as opposite of a radio

transmitter. This is because antenna is used to capture radio waves in receiver.

Generally, it is only a length of wire. However, a very small AC current will be induced

in the antenna when the wire is exposed to radio waves. Then, the radio frequency (RF)

signal with very weak is amplified by RF amplifier to enable the processing of the

signal by a tuner. Basically, the tuner can be defined as a circuit that responsible to

process the signal by extracting signals of resonant frequency. In other words, any AC

signals at frequency other than resonant frequency will be blocked. After that, the

useful information is extracted from the carrier wave by detector. Last but not least, an

amplifier is used to amplify the weak signal so that it can be executed. Figure 12

depicts the block diagram of radio receiver.

Figure 3.20 Block diagram of radio receiver

Page 87: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

72

3.3.2.1 Chosen Receiver

In our case, FrSky V8R4-II 2.4Ghz 4CH receiver is used in the flight testing.

Figure 3.21 displays the receiver chosen.

Figure 3.21 FrSky V8R4-II 2.4Ghz 4CH receiver

This receiver is selected due to a few reasons. The main reason is the frequency

band of the transmitter and receiver must be the same, that is, 2.4 GHz in this case to

receive signals wirelessly from transmitter successfully.

Operation

The power required for operation of receiver is supplied by battery. The battery

used in the flight testing is Li-Po battery. The operation specifications of the receiver

are stated in table 9.

Table 3.13 Operation specifications of receiver

No Specifications Values

1 Operating voltage 3 to 16 V (HV version)

2 Operating current 30 mA

3 Specified Range >1km

Although the receiver can operate at a large range of voltage, the voltage

supplied to the receiver is only 5V. This is because the Battery Elimination Circuit

(BEC) in Electronic Speed Controller (ESC) reduces the battery voltage to 5V needed

Page 88: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

73

to prevent short circuit from receiver. At the same time, the operating current is

essential when calculating the endurance of the airplane. Moreover, the operating

range indicates the distance of the transmitted signal that can be received. In short, the

larger the range, the more effective the receiver.

RX Protocol

Generally, there are some universal RX protocols including Pulse Width

Modulation (PWM), Pulse Position Modulation (PPM) and Pulse Code Modulation

(PCM). On the other hand, some of the protocols are exclusive to certain brands. For

example, FrSky uses SBUS as RX protocols. The example of analog signal and its

corresponding PWM and PPM signals are depicted in figure 3.22.

Figure 3.22 Example of analogue signal and its corresponding PWM and PPM

signals

PWM can be defined as an analogue signal where the pulse length indicates

the servo output or throttle position. Usually, the length of the signal normal varies

between 1000s (minimum) to 2000s (maximum). However, this protocol is

becoming less popular due to its low cost. This is due to messy wiring especially when

more channels are required.

Therefore, PPM is introduced with only one signal wire is used for several

channels. In this case, the series of PWM signals are sent one after another on the same

Page 89: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

74

wire. As a result, the received signals may be not as accurate as the serial

communications. However, it is more popular and supported by many flight controllers.

Furthermore, PCM is a data type similar to PPM. However, it is a digital signal.

In other words, the value is between 0 and 1. The advantages of this protocol is it

enables the signal error detection and even error correction. Therefore, the conclusion

that PCM is more reliable can be mode. Nevertheless, addition conversion of the signal

is required and leads to a more expensive model.

During our flight testing, since we are using the FrSky communication system,

its exclusive communication protocol is required to be investigated as well. The serial

communication protocol used is Serial BUS (SBUS). In this case, up to 18 channels

are supported by using only one signal cable. Basically, it is the inversion of UART

communication signal. However, an inverter may be required as some of the flight

controller cannot accept the signal such as Naze32 Rev5.

Features

The receiver is able to compatible with al FrSky modules that is in V8_mode

and D_mode. Referring to the transmitter manual, the D8 mode allows it to compatible

with the receiver. Therefore, the conclusion that this pair of transmitter and receiver

can be bind. However, it allows only one-way communication. In other words, it can

only receive the transmitted signal but cannot send the information back to transmitter.

At the same time, it has a latency of 22ms. This value is considered small enough

because the flight speed is limited to 20 m/s in our flight testing. Therefore, there is

acceptable time gap for the pilot to recover the airplane if there is any incident happens.

Compatibility and Binding Mode

The transmitter manual states the D8 mode is used in the RF module. The

D_mode used indicates the telemetry information is involved. After that, the

procedures of putting the receiver into the binding mode is described. Firstly, make

sure that the Switch 1 and Switch 2 are OFF. After that, connect the Channels 1 and 2

signal pins of the receiver by the provided jumper. Then, the receiver is connected to

the battery directly. Note that the F/S button on receiver is no need to be hold.

Page 90: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

75

Binding Procedures

Before conducting the flight testing, the receiver must be bind with transmitter

to allow the information transmission. The binding procedures are stated as below:

1. The transmitter is turned on and switched to PPM mode.

2. The transmitter is turned off.

3. The transmitter is turned on while holding the F/S button on transmitter module.

4. The button is released. In this case, the flashing of RED LED on the transmitter

module accompanied with the beeper sound indicate the transmitter is ready to

bind to the receiver.

5. The receiver is put in the binding mode. Then, the flashing RED LED on

receiver indicates the binding process is completed.

6. Both of the transmitter and receiver are turned off. The jumper is disconnected.

7. The transmitted is turned on and the receiver is connected to battery. As a result,

the blinking GREEN LED on receiver indicates the received signal strength.

Operating Range

Before the flight testing, the pre-flight range check is done. This is because

nearby metal fences, concrete building or trees may reflect the signals. As a result, loss

of signal may occur both during range check and during the flight test. The checking

procedures are stated as below:

1. The model is placed at least 60cm (two feet) above non-metal contaminated

ground.

2. The receiver antennas are separated in the model. Note that they should not

touch the ground.

3. The antenna of the transmitter is placed in a vertical position.

4. The transmitter and the receiver are turned on.

5. The F/S button of the transmitter module is pressed for 4 seconds to enter range

check mode. As a result, the RED LED of the transmitter module is off and the

GREEN LED is flashed rapidly. The effective distance is decreased to 1/30 of

full range.

Page 91: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

76

6. The checker is walked away from the model. At the same time, the controls on

the transmitter are operated. This is to confirm that all of the controls operate

normally to at least 30 meters.

7. The F/S button of the transmitter module is pressed again to exit the range

check mode. As a result, the RED LED is on and indicates it is back to normal

operation.

3.3.3 Converting Signals from Transmitter to Receiver

The electromagnetic signals are generated by the pilot by adjusting the gimbals.

From that, the digital data is transmitted to the radio receiver. After that, the data is

interpreted by the radio receiver. The stack of data is then sent to the particular

destinations depending on the channels. The channels connecting with receiver are

shown in table 3.14 whereas the wiring diagram is portrayed in figure 3.23.

Table 3.14 Channels of receiver

Channel Flying Mode

Channel 1 Roll

Channel 2 Pitch

Channel 3 Throttle

Channel 4 Yaw

Page 92: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

77

Figure 3.23 Wiring Diagram of Flight Testing

For example, if the gimbal at the right hand side of transmitter is pushed

downwards, the digital data is received by the receiver and transferred to servo motor

connecting to the elevator through channel 2. As a result, the aircraft pitches

downwards. Besides, if the gimbal at the left hand side of transmitter is pushed

upwards, electromagnetic waves are transmitted to receiver and then transferred to

ESC that connects with brushless motor. Therefore, the speed of the motor can be

controller precisely.

3.3.4 Signal Interference

Since the signals are travelled wirelessly, there are some types of interference

that susceptible to the airplane. The levels of interference should be minimized as it

weakens the wireless signals. If the signals are weakened or completely prevented, the

airplane will loss of control and accidents or incidents might occur.

Page 93: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

78

3.3.4.1 Possible Signal Interferences

First and foremost, the most common interference source is physical objects

such as trees, buildings and other physical structures. The amount of RF signal that

can pass through the walls is determined by the density of the wall. For example, a

signal is difficult to pass through a concrete wall. As a result, the signal is weakened

or interfered.

At the same time, radio frequency interference my cause interferences to signal.

In this case, RF range of 2.4 GHz system is used. However, there are many other

devices used this channel such as microwaves, cordless phones and Wi-Fi devices. As

consequences, the devices may cause noise and weaken the signals transmitted.

Furthermore, electrical interference serves as one of the sources of signal

interference. This interference comes from devices such as computers, fans or any

other motorized devices. The interference level from this source is depending on the

proximity of the electrical device to the wireless access point. However, impact of this

interference type on wireless transmission is greatly reduced

Moreover, the integrity of signals is greatly depended on environmental factors.

For example, electrical interference could be caused by lightning. Besides, the signals

can be weakened as they passed through a fog.

3.3.4.2 Technology to Reduce Interferences

The signal interference is a big issue and an attention should be given in this

part. Therefore, there are a few technology is researched to reduce the interference.

Spread-Spectrum Technology

First and foremost, the most popular technology is spread-spectrum technology.

Originally, the data is travelled straight through a single RF band due to it is the

shortest distance between two points. This type of transmission is called narrowband

Page 94: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

79

transmission. On the other hand, spread spectrum technology requires the data signals

either changing the data pattern constantly or alternate between two carrier frequencies.

Therefore, the data is clearer and easier to be detected. Figure 3.24 shows two types of

spread-spectrum radio.

Figure 3.24 Types of spread-spectrum technology

In FHSS technology, the frequencies are changed in a predictable pattern by

using narrowband signals. The term frequency hopping is referred when the data

signals hopping between narrow channels following a predetermined cyclical pattern.

Therefore, this technology is strongly resistant to interference and environmental

factors.

On the other hand, the spreading of signal is over a full transmission frequency

spectrum with DSSS transmissions. The main characteristics of this technology is

redundant bit pattern is sent with sending of every bit of data in order to increase both

safety and reliability. In this case, the impact of interference and background noise can

be reduced. Although this technology provides greater better security and signal

delivery, it is a sensitive technology that may be affected by many environmental

factors.

Spread-Spectrum Technology

Frequency-Hopping Spread-Spectrum (FHSS) Technology

Direct-Sequence Spread-Spectrum (DSSS) Technology

Page 95: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

80

Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM)

This technique allows transferring of large amounts of data over 52 separate

and evenly spaced frequencies. In other words, the radio signal is split into these

frequencies and at the same time transmitted to the receiver. As a result, crosstalk

interference is greatly reduced by splitting the signal and transmitted over different

frequencies.

3.3.5 Communication resolution

Basically, communication resolution can be defined as the magnitude

difference between adjacent steps as shown in figure 3.25. Therefore, it is also called

quantization interval or quantum. At the same time, the resolution is equal to the

voltage of the minimum step size, which is equal to the voltage of the least significant

bit. By referring to the manufacturer’s datasheet, both of the transmitters and receivers

have the channel resolution of 3072 steps.

Figure 3.25 Communication resolution

From the figure, it is obvious that the received and transmitted signals are

distorted with decreasing in the communication resolution. On the other hand, a large

value of communication resolution reduces the dynamic range of the signal as shown

in figure 3.26. Nevertheless, a signal interference can be detected easily with the

resolution. As a result, the accidents or incidents can be eliminated.

Page 96: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

81

Figure 3.26 Relationship between resolution and dynamic range

3.3.6 Antenna

Generally, the process of converting oscillating electrical energy into

electromagnetic radiation is done by using an antenna. At the same time, antenna also

do the opposite work (conversion of electromagnetic radiation into oscillations of

electrical energy). The block diagram of a typical radio system is depicted in figure

3.27.

Figure 3.27 Block diagram of typical radio system [4]

From the figure, allocation of radio signal with a RF carrier wave along a

defined channel width. After that, the carrier wave is modulated and transmitted into

space by an antenna. These waves are propagating in space until meeting a receiving

antenna that receives them. Then, the waves are demodulated and converted into

oscillating electrical energy.

Page 97: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

82

3.3.6.1 Antenna Type

Basically, most of the radio control system uses rubber ducky antenna. This is

mainly due to it is compact and very robust in the same time. At the same time, figure

3.28 depicts the components in the antenna whereas table 3.15 shows the functions of

the components.

Figure 3.28 Components of rubber ducky antenna

Table 3.15 Functions of rubber ducky antenna components

No Components Function

1 Element Transmit the oscillating electrical signal to the air as

electromagnetic waves

2 Ground Plane Amplify the radio signal transmitted or received by the

element

3 Coaxial Transfer electrical signals without transmitting radio

signals

4 Structure Provide physical support for the antenna

5 Connector Connects the components to electrical signal source

(TX) or sink (RX)

This antenna consists of dipole antennas and are omni-directional. In other

words, the radio frequency (RF) energy can be propagated in 360 in the horizontal

plane. The radiation pattern when the antenna is oriented vertically is shown in the

Page 98: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

83

figure 3.29. The figure shows a radiation pattern resembling a donut shape that are

symmetrical 360 in the horizontal plane. At the same time, the vertical beamwidth of

approximately 75 is portrayed in the figure. Therefore, a 3D radiation pattern is

depicted in figure 3.30.

Figure 3.29 Radiation pattern of dipole antenna

Figure 3.30 3D radiation pattern of dipole antenna

3.3.6.2 Gains

Antenna gain serves as one of the performance measurement by considering

the combination of directivity and electrical efficiency of antenna. In general,

transmitting gain displays the efficiency of the antenna converting power input into

radio waves in a specific direction. On the other hand, the efficiency of converting

arriving radio waves into electrical power is described by receiving gain. Basically,

there are three units of the antenna gain as shown in table 3.16.

Page 99: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

84

Table 3.16 Units of gain

Unit Description

dB decibels

Eg: 2 dB indicates 2 times the energy relative to isotropic antenna in the

peak direction of radiation

dBi decibels relative to an isotropic antenna

Eg: 3 dBi shows twice the power relative to isotropic antenna in the peak

direction

𝐺𝑑𝐵𝑖= 10 log10 𝐺

dBd decibels relative to a dipole antenna

Eg: 7.85 dBd depicts the peak gain

𝐺𝑑𝐵𝑑= 𝐺𝑑𝐵𝑖

− 2.15𝑑𝐵

For both of the transmitter and receiver selected, there are a few instructions

given by the manufacturer to obtain the best signal. The procedures for receiver

antenna to obtain the best signal are as followed:

1. Keep the two antennas as straight as possible to prevent reduction of the

effective range

2. The two antennas should be placed perpendicular to each other.

3. Keep the antennas away from conductive materials by at least half inch.

4. Keep the antennas away from ESC, motor and other noise sources as far as

possible.

At the same time, the instructions for module antenna to obtain the best signal

are stated as below:

1. Avoid transmitter antenna from pointing directly to the model during the flight

as it will create a weak signal for receiver.

2. Keep the antenna perpendicular to the transmitter’s face. This is because a

better RF condition can be created for the receiver.

3. Never grip the antenna during flight due to degradation of the RF quality.

Page 100: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

85

CHAPTER 4

WING ANALYSIS

4.1 Introduction

Wings are the most important component in an aircraft because wings generate

most of the lift while moving rapidly through the air or some other fluid. The shape of

aircraft wings are known as airfoil shape. Wings come in different configurations ,

depending on the aircraft purposes. They are also attached to fuselage at different

angles and different position. In order for the wing to generate lift, it needs to be

positioned at a correct value of angle of attack.

Figure 4.1 Streamline on airfoil surface

As according to figure 4.1, the air streamline coming from the leading edge of

the airfoil will split into two parts, the upper streamline and the lower streamline. The

upper streamline will have higher velocity than the lower part therefore created a

region with a lower air pressure on top of the airfoil and vice versa. This phenomenon

caused the difference in air pressure between those two streamlines. The differences

can be measured directly by using suitable equipment or instrumentation or by using

Page 101: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

86

the basic physics principal, Bernoulli’s principle. In short, lift produced can be

determined from the different in pressure and velocity for the top surface of the airfoil

and its bottom surface.

Figure 4.2 Different types of monoplane

A fixed-wing aircraft can have different number of wings; monoplane, biplane,

quadruplane and multiplane. Monoplane is a one wing plane. It is also the simplest one

to be built. There are several wing positions based on Figure 4.2 that distinguish every

type of monoplane which are low wing, mid wing, shoulder wing, high wing and

parasol wing.

A low wing is the type of aircraft that has wings positioned on or almost at the

bottom of the fuselage. By locating the wing down low, it allows a better visibility and

releases the central fuselage from carrying wing spar. A mid wing is position midway

up the fuselage. The fuselage is now bound to carry the wing spar and hence reduce

the useful fuselage volume near its centre of gravity, where space is often in most

demand. A shoulder wing is a category that is located in between mid wing and high

wing. The configuration for this type is that the wing is situated close to the top surface

of the fuselage but not exactly on the top of the fuselage. A tall wing has its wing

mounted on top of the upper surface of the fuselage floor. This shares many benefits

and drawbacks with the shoulder wing, but the high wing has less visibility upwards

on a light aircraft. A parasol wing is the type of wing that is not being attached directly

to the fuselage but instead is being supported by cabane struts or pylon. This

configuration often needs additional bracing.

Page 102: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

87

4.2 Wing Configuration

As for the wing configuration, the type of fixed wing monoplane has been

chosen since it is the simplest configuration to be fabricated. In addition to that, a

monoplane is the most common configuration since it has the highest efficiency and

lowest drag. Apart from that, the high wing is being picked instead of low wing

because low wing aircraft is prone to incur more ground effect during landing than

high wing. Shown below in table 4.1 is the tabulated data for the detail specification

for our aircraft.

Table 4.1 Wing Configuration

Aircraft Type Fixed-wing Monoplane

Wing Type High Wing

Airfoil Type M15

Wingspan 1.4 m

Wing Area 0.392 m2

Wing Chord 0.28 m

Aspect Ratio 5

Coefficient of Lift Cruising – 0.7173

Clmax – 1.3308

According to Mohammad (2012), aileron takes about 5 to 10% of the wing area,

the ratio of aileron chord to wing chord is about 15 to 25%, the ratio of aileron span to

wing span is about 20 to 30% and the inboard aileron span is about 60 to 80%. Shown

in Table 4.2 is the dimension of aileron designed by this group.

Page 103: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

88

Table 4.2 Aileron Configuration

Half-Wing Aileron

0.196 m2 Area (5%) 0.0098 m2

0.28 m Chord (20%) 0.056 m

0.7 m Span (25%) 0.175 m

Inboard Span (70%) 0.49 m

Figure 4.3 Full dimension of half wing with aileron

Figure 4.3 illustrated the dimension of half wing for this aircraft. The tabulated

dimension can be referred in Table 4.1 and 4.2

4.3 Shear and Bending Stresses

A structure has the purpose of carrying loads that it was design for. In order to

do so, it needs to be able to transfer the load from one point to another. For an instance,

the load Is being transmitted from the location of the load to the supports. This is done

by developing a system called internal force system and the distribution of these

internal forces must be identified before the stress distributions and displacements can

be calculated respectively. In structural design, knowledge about stress is very

important since any members in the structure must be able to withstand the maximum

amount of load exerted on its cross sectional area so that will not cause breakdown in

the crystalline structure of the material or simply said, a structural failure. On top of

that, strains and displacements are also needed to be calculated in order to make sure

that the member in the structural system retains adequate rigidity or stiffness as well

as strength to avoid distortions that can affect the surrounding of the structure.

Page 104: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

89

Now that the dimension of the aileron has been determined, the next step is to

identify the strength of the wing with and without ailerons so that the material can be

chose properly. The stresses can be obtained by drawing the shear force and bending

moment diagram for the mentioned structures at cruising speed with different load

factors which are g = -1.5, 1, and 3. Since the analysis is taken for cruising state

therefore the lift is assumed to be equal to the weight of the aircraft.

Figure 4.4 Front view of the aircraft

The analysis is done on half wing since they are symmetrical as can be seen

from Figure 4.4. Now the free body diagram can be illustrated as a cantilever beam

and therefore the weight of the wing and the fuselage, the wingspan and the width of

the fuselage need to be divided into half. Only then the weight distribution can be

calculated.

𝑊𝑖𝑛𝑔: 1

2⁄ 𝑊𝑤

12⁄ 𝑏𝑤

=1.99905 𝑁

0.7 𝑚= 2.8558 𝑁/𝑚

𝐹𝑢𝑠𝑒𝑙𝑎𝑔𝑒: 1

2⁄ 𝑊𝑓

12⁄ 𝑏𝑓

=2.2549 𝑁

0.05 𝑚= 45.098 𝑁/𝑚

Page 105: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

90

4.3.1 Wing without ailerons

A. CASE 1: -1.5g

𝐿𝑖𝑓𝑡 𝐷𝑖𝑠𝑡𝑟𝑖𝑏𝑢𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛 =−1.5(3.3 𝑘𝑔 × 9.81

𝑚𝑠2)

1.4 𝑚= −34.6854 𝑁/𝑚

Figure 4.5 Free body diagram for g = -1.5 without aileron

Figure 4.6 Shear force and bending moment diagram for g = -1.5 without aileron

B. CASE 2: 1g

𝐿𝑖𝑓𝑡 𝐷𝑖𝑠𝑡𝑟𝑖𝑏𝑢𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛 =1(3.3 𝑘𝑔 × 9.81

𝑚𝑠2)

1.4 𝑚= 23.1236 𝑁/𝑚

Page 106: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

91

Figure 4.7 Free body diagram for g = 1 without aileron

Figure 4.8 Shear force and bending moment diagram for g = 1 without aileron

C. CASE 3: 3g

𝐿𝑖𝑓𝑡 𝐷𝑖𝑠𝑡𝑟𝑖𝑏𝑢𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛 =3(3.3 𝑘𝑔 × 9.81

𝑚𝑠2)

1.4 𝑚= 69.3707 𝑁/𝑚

Figure 4.9 Free body diagram for g = 3 without aileron

Page 107: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

92

Figure 4.10 Shear force and bending moment diagram for g = 3 without aileron

In designing aircraft, there must be a limit set to the flying qualities that

depends on the capability of the structure to withstand certain loads without

experiencing damage or failure. This limit is normally calculated by first identif ying

the load factors. As for this case, the minimum load factor is -1.5 while the maximum

is 3. Shear force and bending moment diagram has been plotted for each case to

determine the maximum stress the structure can withstand before failing.

For the first case, g = -1.5, as refer to Figure 4.5 and 4.6, the maximum shear

force exerted on the structure is at the central fuselage. The force is then decrease

substantially until reaching 24.4018 N at the wing-fuselage attachment part before

becoming zero at the wing tip. The same trend can be seen for the bending moment

where maximum bending moment occurs at the central fuselage before increasing

slowly until it finally reaches zero at wing tip. As for the third case, g = 3, by referring

to Figure 4.9 and 4.10, the central fuselage also becomes the most crucial part as it

needs to withstand the highest amount of shear force and bending moment before

finally reaching zero. The reason why central fuselage needs to withstand the largest

amount of force and moment is because it acts as support system to the cantilever beam.

However, since the analysis done in this part is for the wing, therefore our main

concern is at the wing-fuselage attachment part. This is because, this part needs to be

able to support whole weight of the wing together with the lift created without

Page 108: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

93

damaging the wing structure. The shear and bending stresses that have been calculated

earlier for their respective load factor at the wing-fuselage attachment part are

tabulated as shown in Table 4.3 below:

Table 4.3 Shear and bending stresses for load factor -1.5g, 1g and 3g without aileron

Load Factor Shear Stress, τ (kPa) Bending Stress, σ(kPa)

-1.5 4.304 -310.817

1 -2.3234 167.801

3 -7.038 469.237

From the values obtained from the theoretical analysis, it can be seen that the

structure is supposed to be able to withstand shear stress in the range of −7.038 kPa ≤

τ ≤ 4.304 kPa while the bending stress is in between the range of −310.817 kPa ≤

σ ≤ 469.237 kPa. Therefore, in order to ensure a safe flight, the aircraft must be

operated within this range only. Note that this analysis is only applicable for the wing

without ailerons.

4.3.2 Wing with ailerons

The first thing to do for analysis of wing with ailerons is to find the lift

generated by the aileron. The lift can be calculated by using the usual lift formula, 𝐿 =

1

2𝜌𝑣2𝑆𝐶𝐿. Since this analysis is done during the cruising state, therefore CL during

cruising needs to be determined by finding out its respective angle of attack In this

case, the angle of attack during cruising is 𝛼 = 2.8 so 𝐶𝐿 ≈ 0.7173

𝐿𝑎𝑖𝑙𝑒𝑟𝑜𝑛 =1

2× 1.225 × 19.32 × 0.0098 × 0.7173 = 1.6038 𝑁

The lift distribution on aileron is then can be also calculated since the lift

generated by aileron is known.

𝐿𝑎𝑖𝑙𝑒𝑟𝑜𝑛

𝑏𝑎𝑖𝑙𝑒𝑟𝑜𝑛=

1.6038 𝑁

0.175 𝑚= 9.1645 𝑁/𝑚

Page 109: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

94

A. CASE 1: -1.5g

Figure 4.11 Free body diagram for g = -1.5 with aileron

Figure 4.12 Shear force and bending moment diagram for g = -1.5 with aileron

B. CASE 2: 1g

Figure 4.13 Free body diagram for g = 1 with aileron

Page 110: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

95

Figure 4.14 Shear force and bending moment diagram for g = 1 with aileron

C. CASE 3: 3g

Figure 4.15 Free body diagram for g = 3 with aileron

Figure 4.16 Shear force and bending moment diagram for g = 3 with aileron

Page 111: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

96

The trend as for the wings with aileron seems to be similar to without aileron

but with different values of stresses. For an instance, by looking at Figure 4.11 and

4.12, the maximum shear stress is 4.304kPa while maximum bending stress is 277.666

kPa. This data is then compared with the second case which is referring to Figure 4.13

and 4.14. from here we can see that the maximum shear stress should be exerted on

the wing is 2.6064 kPa while bending stress is 200.9617 kPa. Finally for the third case,

as illustrated in Figure 4.15 and 4.16, the wing should withstand the highest stresses

which are 7.908 kPa for shear stress and 582.526 kPa for bending stress. Shown in

table 4.4 below are the data collected between without aileron and with aileron.

Table 4.4 Comparison of shear and bending stresses for load factor -1.5g, 1g and 3g

Load Factor

Shear Stress, τ (kPa) Bending Stress, σ(kPa)

Without

aileron

With aileron Without

aileron

With aileron

-1.5 4.0208 4.304 -310.817 -277.666

1 -2.3234 -2.6064 167.801 200.9617

3 -7.038 -7.908 469.237 582.526

We can see here from Table 4.4 that wing with aileron should be able to

withstand a slightly more stresses than the one without aileron or in simpler word,

wing with aileron is stronger. This is because aileron just like flaps, when we lower

the aileron, it means that the chord line of the wing is also changed. This results in

producing a higher angle of attack. Therefore, as the angle of attack increases, the lift

is also increases. The increase in lift will simultaneously cause the increase in induced

drag. In short, the wing with aileron should be stronger than without aileron is because

it needs to withstand the addition lift and drag generated by the ailerons.

Page 112: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

97

4.4 Lift Distribution of Aileron

The lift distribution of aileron is calculated at different angle of attack and its

respective velocity is identified afterwards The lift is calculated by using formula:

L = N cos 𝛼 − A sinα

where

𝑁 = − ∫ (𝑃𝑢𝑝𝑝𝑒𝑟

𝑇𝐸

𝐿𝐸𝑐𝑜𝑠𝜃 + 𝜏𝑢𝑝𝑝𝑒𝑟 𝑠𝑖𝑛𝜃)𝑑𝑆𝑢𝑝𝑝𝑒𝑟 + ∫ (𝑃𝑙𝑜𝑤𝑒𝑟𝑐𝑜𝑠𝜃 − 𝜏𝑙𝑜𝑤𝑒𝑟 𝑠𝑖𝑛𝜃)𝑑𝑆𝑙𝑜𝑤𝑒𝑟

𝑇𝐸

𝐿𝐸

𝐴 = ∫ (−𝑃𝑢𝑝𝑝𝑒𝑟

𝑇𝐸

𝐿𝐸𝑠𝑖𝑛𝜃 + 𝜏𝑢𝑝𝑝𝑒𝑟 𝑐𝑜𝑠𝜃)𝑑𝑆𝑢𝑝𝑝𝑒𝑟 + ∫ (𝑃𝑙𝑜𝑤𝑒𝑟𝑠𝑖𝑛𝜃 + 𝜏𝑙𝑜𝑤𝑒𝑟𝑐𝑜𝑠𝜃)𝑑𝑆𝑙𝑜𝑤𝑒𝑟

𝑇𝐸

𝐿𝐸

The geometrical relations for the integration of pressure and shear stress

distributions over a two-dimensional body surface of aileron is shown in Figure 4.17.

Figure 4.17 2D body surface of aileron

To obtain the normal force, the values of pressure, shear stress and angle are

obtained as follows:

Angle, θ = tan−13 × 10−3

0.056= 3.066°

Page 113: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

98

Based on the elevation of our aircraft (10m) the following parameters are

identified

Pressure , plower and pupper = 1.01 × 105 Pa

Temperature , T = 288.09K

Density , ρ = 1.225kg /𝑚3

Dynamic viscocity, μ = 1.78869 × 10−5𝑁𝑠/𝑚2

Freestream velocity,𝑈∞ =0.2

√1.4×287×288.15= 68.059m/s

τupper surface = τlower surface = μdu

dy

= (1.78869 × 10−5) (𝑈∞

0.025𝑐)

= (1.78869 × 10−5) (68.059

0.025(0.056))

= 0.8695Pa

N = − ∫ ((1.01 × 105)cos3.066° + (0.8695)sin3.066°)𝑑𝑆𝑢𝑝𝑝𝑒𝑟

0.056

0

+ ∫ ((1.01 × 105)cos3.066° − (0.8695)sin3.066°)𝑑𝑆𝑙𝑜𝑤𝑒𝑟

0.056

0

= -0.0065216 N

A = ∫ ((−1.01× 105)sin3.066° + (0.8695)cos3.066°)𝑑𝑆𝑢𝑝𝑝𝑒𝑟

0.056

0

+ ∫ ((1.01 × 105)sin3.066° + (0.86951)cos3.066°)𝑑𝑆𝑙𝑜𝑤𝑒𝑟

0.056

0

=0.097216 𝑁

Taking α = -12° as sample,

L = (−0.0065216) cos(−12°) − (0.097216) sin(−12°)

= 0.013833 N

Page 114: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

99

The lift coefficient can be obtained based on the classical thin airfoil theory:

the symmetrical airfoil. To do so, the following formulae is used to determine

theoretically which is as follows:

𝐶𝐿 = 2𝜋𝛼

Upon obtaining value of lift coefficient, the respective velocity can be

calculated afterwards by using equation:

𝑉 = √2(𝐿)

(𝜌)(𝑆)(𝐶𝐿)

Table 4.5 Calculated data at different angle of attack for aileron

Angle of Attack, α

(°) Lift Force, L (N) Coefficient of Lift, CL Velocity, V (m/s)

-12 0.0138 -1.3160 1.3234

-10 0.0105 -1.0966 1.2605

-8 0.0071 -0.8773 1.1588

-6 0.0037 -0.6580 0.9648

-4 0.0003 -0.4387 0.3236

-2 -0.0031 -0.2193 1.5407

0 -0.0065 0.0000 0.0000

2 -0.0099 0.2193 2.7437

4 -0.0133 0.4386 2.2464

6 -0.0167 0.6580 2.0531

8 -0.0200 0.8773 1.9483

10 -0.0233 1.0966 1.8816

12 -0.0266 1.3159 1.8348

Based on Table 4.5, it can be seen that the coefficient of lift is negative as the

angle of attack is negative. However, as the angle of attack increases, the coefficient

of lift also increases. This trend differs from the velocity trend. The highest velocity is

when the aileron is deflected at 2° with 2.7437 m/s while the lowest velocity is when

the aileron is not being deflected.

Page 115: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

100

Figure 4.18 Graph of Lift against Angle of Attack

Now as refer to Figure 4.18, it can be seen that the coefficient of the lift and

angle of attack has a linear relationship as mentioned previously, the lift increases as

the angle of attack increases.

4.5 Wing Loading

Wing loading is the total mass of an aircraft divided by the area of the wing.

The level flight of an aircraft straight stalling speed is determined by wing loading. An

aircraft with larger wing area relative to mass have low wing loading compared to an

aircraft with smaller wing area. The faster an aircraft fly, the more lift produced by the

wing area. Therefore, the faster aircraft usually obtained higher wing loading

compared to the slower aircraft. The higher wing loading also increases takeoff landing

distances and decreases the maneuverability. According to Peery, Schrenk’s

approximation assumes that the load distribution on an untwisted wing or tail has a

shape that is the average of the actual platform shape and an elliptic shape of the same

span and area. It is simple approximation for the spanwise lift distribution that has

been accepted by the Civil Aeronautics Administration (CAA) as satisfactory for civil

airplanes.

-0.02

-0.015

-0.01

-0.005

0

0.005

0.01

0.015

0.02

0.025

0.03

-15 -10 -5 0 5 10 15

Lift against Angle of Attack

Page 116: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

101

4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method

The wing specification is shown in table 4.6.

Table 4.6 Wing specification

Parameters Value

Wing section 18

Wingspan, b 1.4 m

Wing Area (S) 0.392 𝑚2

Aspect Ratio, AR 5

Chord Length 0.28m

Taper Ratio 1

Cl max 2D 1.3

Wing area;

𝑆 = 𝑡𝑖𝑝 𝑐ℎ𝑜𝑟𝑑 × 𝑏 = 0.392 𝑚2

Aspect ratio;

𝐴𝑅 =𝑏2

𝑆= 5

Chord length;

𝑐 =𝑏

𝐴𝑅= 0.28𝑚

Taper ratio;

𝜆 =𝑏

𝑆= 0.48

Limit load factor;

𝑙𝑖𝑚𝑖𝑡 𝑙𝑜𝑎𝑑 𝑓𝑎𝑐𝑡𝑜𝑟 =𝑙𝑖𝑚𝑖𝑡 𝑙𝑜𝑎𝑑

𝑤𝑒𝑖𝑔ℎ𝑡 𝑜𝑓 𝑎𝑖𝑟𝑐𝑟𝑎𝑓𝑡=

𝑚𝑎𝑥𝑖𝑚𝑢𝑚 𝑡𝑎𝑘𝑒𝑜𝑓𝑓 𝑤𝑒𝑖𝑔ℎ𝑡

𝑒𝑚𝑝𝑡𝑦 𝑤𝑒𝑖𝑔ℎ𝑡

= 1.179

Page 117: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

102

Table 4.7 Wing Loading Data

Station y (m) 2y/b √(1-(2y/b)^2) 4S/πb*√(1-(2y/b)^2)

1 0.0 0 1.0000 0.356

2 0.04 0.1 0.9983 0.356

3 0.08 0.1 0.9930 0.354

4 0.12 0.2 0.9843 0.351

5 0.16 0.2 0.9719 0.346

6 0.21 0.3 0.9557 0.341

7 0.25 0.4 0.9356 0.333

8 0.29 0.4 0.9112 0.325

9 0.33 0.5 0.8822 0.314

10 0.37 0.5 0.8482 0.302

11 0.41 0.6 0.8084 0.288

12 0.45 0.6 0.7621 0.272

13 0.49 0.7 0.7079 0.252

14 0.54 0.8 0.6439 0.230

15 0.58 0.8 0.5666 0.202

16 0.62 0.9 0.4696 0.167

17 0.66 0.9 0.3364 0.120

18 0.70 1.0 0.0000 0.000

Page 118: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

103

Table 4.8 Wing Loading Result

n Wo Station y (m) c (m) cCl Cl cClΔy ΔV

1.179 3.3 1

0.0000 0.28 0.318 1.137 0.0131 2.60

1.179 3.3 2

0.0412 0.28 0.318 1.135 0.0131 2.59

1.179 3.3 3

0.0824 0.28 0.317 1.132 0.0130 2.58

1.179 3.3 4

0.1236 0.28 0.315 1.127 0.0130 2.57

1.179 3.3 5

0.1648 0.28 0.313 1.119 0.0128 2.54

1.179 3.3 6

0.2060 0.28 0.310 1.108 0.0127 2.52

1.179 3.3 7

0.2472 0.28 0.307 1.096 0.0125 2.49

1.179 3.3 8

0.2884 0.28 0.302 1.080 0.0124 2.45

1.179 3.3 9

0.3296 0.28 0.297 1.062 0.0121 2.40

1.179 3.3 10

0.3708 0.28 0.291 1.040 0.0119 2.35

1.179 3.3 11

0.4120 0.28 0.284 1.015 0.0115 2.28

1.179 3.3 12

0.4532 0.28 0.276 0.985 0.0112 2.21

1.179 3.3 13

0.4944 0.28 0.266 0.951 0.0107 2.13

1.179 3.3 14 0.5356 0.28 0.255 0.910 0.0102 2.02

1.179 3.3 15

0.5768 0.28 0.241 0.861 0.0096 1.90

1.179 3.3 16

0.6180 0.28 0.224 0.799 0.0087 1.73

1.179 3.3 17

0.6592 0.28 0.200 0.714 0.0041 0.82

1.179 3.3 18

0.7004 0.28 0.000 0.000 0.0000 0.00

Page 119: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

104

Table 4.9 Calculation Result

Station y (m) V ΔM M (N.m) Ln(N)

1 0.0000 38.16 1.52 12.12 63.03

2 0.0412 35.56 1.41 10.60 62.97

3 0.0824 32.97 1.31 9.19 62.79

4 0.1236 30.39 1.20 7.88 62.48

5 0.1648 27.83 1.09 6.68 62.04

6 0.2060 25.28 0.99 5.59 61.47

7 0.2472 22.76 0.89 4.60 60.76

8 0.2884 20.28 0.79 3.71 59.90

9 0.3296 17.83 0.69 2.93 58.87

10 0.3708 15.43 0.59 2.24 57.67

11 0.4120 13.08 0.49 1.66 56.27

12 0.4532 10.80 0.40 1.16 54.63

13 0.4944 8.59 0.31 0.76 52.72

14 0.5356 6.46 0.22 0.45 50.46

15 0.5768 4.44 0.14 0.23 47.73

16 0.6180 2.54 0.07 0.09 44.31

17 0.6592 0.82 0.02 0.02 39.61

18 0.7004 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00

Page 120: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

105

Figure 4.19 Graph Cl vs y

Figure 4.20 Graph cCl vs y

Figure 4.21 Graph Cy vs y

0.000

0.200

0.400

0.600

0.800

1.000

1.200

0.0000 0.2000 0.4000 0.6000 0.8000

Cl

y (m)

0.000

0.050

0.100

0.150

0.200

0.250

0.300

0.350

0.0000 0.2000 0.4000 0.6000 0.8000

cC

L

y(m)

0.000

0.050

0.100

0.150

0.200

0.250

0.300

0.350

0.400

0.0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8

Cy

y(m)

Page 121: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

106

Figure 4.22 Graph Ln vs y

Figure 4.23 Graph V vs y

Figure 4.24 Graph M vs y

For the wing loading, the Schrenk’s approximation method has been used to

calculate the wing loading for this aircraft. In this cases, the calculation is done on the

0.00

10.00

20.00

30.00

40.00

50.00

60.00

70.00

0.0000 0.2000 0.4000 0.6000 0.8000

Ln

y (m)

0.00

5.00

10.00

15.00

20.00

25.00

30.00

35.00

40.00

45.00

0.0000 0.2000 0.4000 0.6000 0.8000

Sh

ear F

orc

e, (

N)

y(m)

0.00

2.00

4.00

6.00

8.00

10.00

12.00

14.00

0.0000 0.1000 0.2000 0.3000 0.4000 0.5000 0.6000 0.7000 0.8000

Ben

din

g M

om

ent,

N (m

)

y(m)

Page 122: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

107

half of the wing. The wing is divided into 18 station. There are several important data

to be used in this analysis which are wing span (b), wing area (S), aspect ratio (AR),

chord length (c), taper ratio, and maximum lift coefficient (Cl max).

Based on data obtained, there are several graph has been plotted to observe the

relationship between the lift coefficient, lift forces, shear forces and bending moment

versus y station of the wing. Figure 4.17 shows the graph of lift coefficient versus y

station of the wing. Based on the graph, the lift coefficient slightly decreases in each

station and fall to zero lift coefficient on tip chord. Similar with the graph cCl vs y, Cy

vs y, Ln vs y graph. The maximum lift coefficient produces at the root chord which is

1.137. For the wing load distribution coefficient, cCl, the maximum value also

obtained at the root chord of the wing which is 0.318. logically, the lift force also

produced the similar type of graph with the lift coefficient. The higher lift force is also

obtained at the root chord of the wing which is 63.03N.

Figure 4.21 shows the graph of shear force versus y station. Based on the result,

the graph shows the decreasing linear type of graph. From that, we can observe that

the shear force decreasing toward the tip chord of the wing. The higher shear force

produces also produce at the root chord which is 38.16 N. For the bending moment

versus station y graph, the bending moment also decreasing when it reach the tip chord

of the wing. The higher bending moment value is 12.12 Nm and zero at the tip chord.

Page 123: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

108

4.5.2 Sample Calculation

a) Calculate wing load distribution coefficient, 𝑐𝐶𝐿 in order to determine the

spanwise shear forces values.

𝑐𝐶𝐿 =4𝑆√1 − (

2𝑦𝑏

)2

2𝜋𝑏+

𝑐

2

𝑐𝐶𝐿 =

4(0.392)√1 − (2(0)1.4

)2

2𝜋 (1.4)+

0.28

2

= 0.318

b) Calculate the local lift coefficient, 𝐶𝐿

𝐶𝐿 =𝑐𝐶𝐿

𝑐ℎ𝑜𝑟𝑑

𝐶𝐿 =0.318

0.28

= 1.135

c) Calculate the value of (𝑐𝐶𝐿∆𝑦)𝑛

(𝑐𝐶𝐿∆𝑦)𝑛 =𝑐𝐶𝐿𝑛 + 𝑐𝐶𝐿(𝑛+1)

2[𝑦𝑛+1 − 𝑦𝑛]

(𝑐𝐶𝐿∆𝑦)𝑛 =0.318 + 0.318

2[0.0412 − 0]

= 0.0131

d) The change in shear force distribution, ∆𝑉𝑛 on each section

∆𝑉𝑛 =(𝑐𝐶𝐿∆𝑦)𝑛 × 𝑛𝑔 × 𝑊𝑜 × 𝑔

Σ(𝑐𝐶𝐿∆𝑦)

∆𝑉𝑛 =0.0131 × 1.179 × 3.3 × 9.81

0.1927

= 2.60 𝑁

Page 124: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

109

e) Compute the corresponding shear force, 𝑉𝑛 value at each station

𝑉𝑛 = Δ𝑉18 + Δ𝑉17 + ⋯ Δ𝑉𝑛

𝑉𝑛 = 0 + 0.82 + ⋯ 2.60

= 38.16 N

f) The changes in bending moment distribution, Δ𝑀𝑛 at each station

Δ𝑀𝑛 =𝑉𝑛+1 + 𝑉𝑛

2(𝑦𝑛+1 − 𝑦𝑛)

Δ𝑀𝑛 =35.56 + 38.16

2(0.0412 − 0)

= 1.52 Nm

g) Corresponding bending moment, 𝑀𝑛 at each station

𝑀𝑛 = Δ𝑀18 + Δ𝑀17 + ⋯ Δ𝑀𝑛

𝑀𝑛 = 0 + 0.02 + ⋯ 1.52

= 12.12 𝑁𝑚2

h) The local lifting force at specified station, 𝐿𝑛

𝐿𝑛 =(𝑐𝐶𝐿)𝑛

Σ𝑐𝐶𝐿Δ𝑦× 𝑛𝑔 × 𝑊0 × 𝑔

𝐿𝑛 =0.318

0.1927× 1.179 × 3.3 × 9.81

= 63.03N

4.6 Wing Mounting

Mounting the wing is one of the most critical steps in building the model.

Depending on the methods used, it can be tedious, but a methodical approach with an

experienced helper will make it much easier. Failure to get this right will result in a

model that will not fly straight or trim properly. The goal is to mount the wing

absolutely square to the fuselage centerline in all respects. Additionally, the incidence

must be correct. The wing should be centered (both tips equal distance from the

fuselage) and perpendicular to the fuselage centerline. The tips should be equal height

Page 125: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

110

above the building board as well. Not counting incidence settings, any adjustment

made affects the others. Therefore, squaring the wing is a matter of "dialing in" more

than anything else. In our project, we plan to mount the wing by using rubber bands as

shown in figure 4.25.

Figure 4.25 Step of wing mounting using rubber bands

By referring to the rubber band sized as shown in figure 4.26, the rubber band

with size 31 was chosen.

Figure 4.26 Rubber band size

Therefore, the extension of the rubber band is calculated as below:

Extension of rubber band, s = 0.28 − 0.0635

= 0.2165 m

Page 126: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

111

The equation to find the ideal of elasticity of rubber band is introduced as below:

∆E =1

2𝑘𝑠2

where

𝑘 = 𝑠𝑝𝑟𝑖𝑛𝑔 𝑐𝑜𝑛𝑠𝑡𝑎𝑛𝑡 𝑜𝑓 𝑟𝑢𝑏𝑏𝑒𝑟 𝑏𝑎𝑛𝑑 = 17.38 𝑁/𝑚

𝑠 = 𝑒𝑥𝑡𝑒𝑛𝑠𝑖𝑜𝑛 𝑜𝑓 𝑟𝑢𝑏𝑏𝑒𝑟 𝑏𝑎𝑛𝑑 = 0.2165 𝑚

Therefore,

∆E =1

2(17.38)(0.2165) 2

= 0.4073 𝐽

As the simple calculation above, we can know one single rubber band tie

around the wing will produce 0.4073 Joules.

By considering the Young’s Modulus of the rubber band, the allowable stress

can be obtained with the equation shown as follow:

E =Allowable Stress

Strain

where

E = Young′s Modulus

Strain =Elongation

Length=

0.2165

0.0635= 3.4094

From figure 4.27, the Young’s Modulus value of the rubber band is assumed

as 1 MPa.

Figure 4.27 Young's Modulus of several items

Page 127: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

112

Therefore, the maximum allowable stress of a single rubber band is calculated

as below:

Allowable Stress = E × Strain

= 1 × 3.4094

= 3.4094 MPa

Since there are 15 rubber bands tied at each side of the wing, the total allowable

stress that can be withstand by the rubber band is assumed as below:

Total Allowable Stress = 3.4094 × 15

= 51.141 MPa

By considering the applied shear stress and bending stress with different flight

case, the safety factor for each flight case is calculated. Since larger shear and bending

stresses are applied without ailerons, the calculations involved only wing without

ailerons. At the same time, the flight cases with -1.5g and 3g produce a higher applied

stresses, the calculations involved only for -1.5g and 3g.

Flight case 1: G = -1.5

From the section above, the applied shear and bending stresses are calculated as 4.304

kPa and -310.817 kPa respectively. Therefore, the safety factor is calculated as follow:

SF for shear stress =0.5 × 51141

4.304

= 5941.1013

SF for bending stress =51141

310.817

= 164.5373

Flight case 2: G = 3

From the section above, the applied shear and bending stresses are calculated as -

7.0384 kPa and 469.2567 kPa respectively. Therefore, the safety factor is calculated

as follow:

Page 128: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

113

SF for shear stress =0.5 × 51141

7.0384

= 3632.999

SF for bending stress =51141

469.2567

= 108.983

From the calculations above, it is shown that the rubber band can withstand

with the applied shear and bending stresses from the flight cases. Therefore, the rubber

band is shown to be can be used in our project to allow us to fly the UAV within the

flight envelope.

Page 129: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

114

CHAPTER 5

FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR ANALYSIS

5.1 Fuselage

5.1.2 Introduction

Fuselage contributes very little to lift and produces more drag but it is an

important structural component. It is the connecting member to all load producing

components such as wing, horizontal tail, vertical tail, landing gear and thus

redistributes the load. It also serves the purpose of housing or accommodating

practically all equipment, accessories and systems in addition to carrying the payload.

Because of large amount of equipment inside the fuselage, it is necessary to provide

sufficient number of cutouts in the fuselage for access and inspection purposes. These

cutouts and discontinuities result in fuselage design being more complicated, less

precise and often more less efficient in design.

As a common member to which other components are attached, thereby

transmitting the loads, fuselage can be considered as a hollow beam. The reactions

produced by the wing, tail or landing gear may be considered as concentrated loads at

the respective attachment points. The balancing reactions are provided by the inertia

forces contributed by the weight of the fuselage structure and the various components

inside the fuselage. These reaction forces are distributed all along the length of the

fuselage, though need not be uniformly. Unlike the wing, which is subjected to mainly

unsymmetrical load, the fuselage is much simpler for structural analysis due to its

symmetrical cross-section and symmetrical loading.

The main load in the case of fuselage is shear load because the load acting on

the wing is transferred to the fuselage skin in the form of shear only. The structural

design of fuselage begins with shear force and bending moment diagrams for the

Page 130: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

115

respective members. The maximum bending stress produced in each of them is

checked to be less than the yield stress of the material chosen for the respective

member.

5.1.3 Shear Force and Bending Moment Diagram

5.1.3.1 Shear Flow Diagram (3g)

Figure 5.1 Shear force diagram for fuselage at 3g

Figure 5.1 shows the shear flow acting across the fuselage for 3g case. The

maximum shear force is 80.81. The crucial part at this diagram is at the wing section

because need to withstand the highest value of force while the lowest is at the nose

with just 0.5208 shear force need to withstand. Thus;

𝜏 =𝐹

𝐴=

80.8122

0.28×0.18

= 1603.4187 Pa

Page 131: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

116

Safety factor = σultimate / σmax

= 2400

1603.4187

=1.497

5.1.3.2 Bending Moment Diagram (3g)

Figure 5.2 Bending moment diagram for fuselage at 3g

Figure 5.2 shows bending moment for 3g case. The maximum bending moment

is 36.4026 Pa. The crucial part at this diagram is at the wing section because need to

withstand the highest value of force while the lowest is at the nose with just 0.5208

bending moment force need to withstand.

I =𝑏𝑑3

12 =

0.28×0.183

12

= 1.3608× 10−4𝑚4

Page 132: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

117

𝜎 =36.4026 × 0.09

1.3608 × 10−4

= 24.076 kPa

5.1.3.3 Shear Flow Diagram (-1.5g)

Figure 5.3 Shear force diagram for fuselage at -1.5g

Figure 5.3 shows the shear flow acting across the fuselage for -1.5g case. The

maximum shear force is 40.406 Pa. The crucial part at this diagram is at the wing

section because need to withstand the highest value of force while the lowest is at the

nose with just 0.5208 shear force need to withstand.

Thus, 𝜏 =𝐹

𝐴=

40.406

0.28×0.18

= 801.7063 Pa

Page 133: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

118

Safety factor = σultimate / σmax

= 2400

801.7063

= 2.99

5.1.3.4 Bending Moment Diagram (-1.5g)

Figure 5.4 Bending moment diagram for fuselage at -1.5g

Figure 5.4 shows bending moment for -1.5g case. The maximum bending

moment is 18.2019 Pa. The crucial part at this diagram is at the wing section because

need to withstand the highest value of force while the lowest is at the nose with just

0.5208 bending moment force need to withstand.

Thus, I =𝑏𝑑3

12 =

0.28×0.183

12

= 1.3608× 10−4𝑚4

Page 134: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

119

𝜎 =18.2019 × 0.09

1.3608 × 10−4

= 12.038 kPa

In aerodynamics, the maximum load factor (at given bank angle) is a

proportion between lift and weight and has a trigonometric relationship. The load

factor is measured in Gs (acceleration of gravity), a unit of force equal to the force

exerted by gravity on a body at rest and indicates the force to which a body is subjected

when it is accelerated. Any force applied to an aircraft to deflect its flight from a

straight line produces a stress on its structure. The amount of this force is the load

factor. For example, a load factor of 3 means the total load on an aircraft’s structure is

three times its weight. Since load factors are expressed in terms of Gs, a load factor of

3 may be spoken of as 3 Gs, or a load factor of 4 as 4 Gs. Load factors are important

for two reasons:

1. It is possible for a pilot to impose a dangerous overload on the aircraft

structures.

2. An increased load factor increases the stalling speed and makes stalls possible

at seemingly safe flight speed.

Based on the title 14 Code of Federal Regulations (14 CFR), part 23, for

certification of the airframe (Subpart C and portions of Subpart D) of normal, utility ,

acrobatic, and commuter category airplanes and airships, the minimum requirement

for safety factor of fuselage is 1.5. The safety factor for 3g and -1.5g is 1.497 and 2.99.

Thus, the safety factor fulfils the requirement for a safe flight.

5.1.4 Shear and Flexural Analysis

5.1.4.1 Conceptual Structural Analysis

By considering the fuselage to be symmetrical, the conceptual structural

analysis is considered to be as shown in Figure 5.5.

Page 135: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

120

Figure 5.5 Stringer location at side

Moment of inertia at station (O) about centroid Y axis:

𝐼𝑦 =𝐼𝑜+𝐴ℎ2

where

𝐼𝑜 is neglected because the value is too small

A: Area of stringer (0.1𝑖𝑛2)

h: height of stringer from centroid

Thus,

𝐼𝑦= 3.54352 ×4×0.1 = 5.0226 𝑖𝑛4

Table 5.1 give the necessary calculation in order to determine the flange

bending stress and net total shear load to be taken by the cell skin.

Table 5.1 Flange analysis

Stiffener

no. Arm z Area 𝝈𝒃

𝑷𝑿=𝝈𝒃 ×

𝒂 dz/dx dy/dx Pz Py

1 3.54 0.01 -969.78 -9.70 -0.30 0.00 2.91 0.00

2 -3.54 0.01 969.78 9.70 0.30 0.00 2.91 0.00

Shear taken by stringers= 5.82

Page 136: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

121

The stringer has a z component, thus the stringer axial load help resist the

external shear load gives 5.82 lb for half the fuselage section. Hence, net web shear at

station (O) equals:

𝑉𝑤𝑒𝑏= 𝑉𝑒𝑥𝑡+ 𝑉𝑓𝑙𝑎𝑛𝑔𝑒

= 1178.2896 + (2×5.82)

= 1189.9296 lb

5.1.4.2 Flexural Shear Flow

Calculation of Flexural Shear Flow,

q= 𝑞𝑜 - 𝑉𝑧 (𝑤𝑒𝑏) ∑ 𝑎𝑧

𝐼𝑦

q= 𝑞𝑜 - 1189.9296∑ 𝑎𝑧

5.0226

= 𝑞𝑜 – 236.92 ∑ 𝑎𝑧 ……… (A)

Due to symmetry of the section about z axis, the flexural shear flow in the web

at the centre line is zero. So, 𝑞𝑜 will be taken as zero and the summation in equation

(A) will be start with stinger (1)

𝑞12 = 0- 236.92 (3.54 × 0.01) = - 8.39 lb/in

Table 5.2 Flexural shear flow at each stiffener

Stiffener no 𝑽𝒁/ 𝑰𝒀 az q (Ib/in)

1 236.92 0.04 -8.39

2 236.92 -0.04 0.00

3 236.92 -0.04 8.34

4 236.92 0.04 -0.04

The torsional moment T about the centroid of the section at station (O) equals

5 × 1178.29= 5891.45 Ib (clockwise when looking toward station 150). Due to

symmetry of section at station (O), in-plane component of the stringer load produces

Page 137: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

122

zero moment about the section centroid. For equilibrium a constant shear flow 𝑞1 is

necessary to make ∑ 𝑀𝑥 = 0

𝑞1= 𝑇

2𝐴 =

5891.45

2×27.900 = -104.58 lb/in

Table 5.3 Constant shear flow at each stiffener

Stiffener no q (lb/in)

3 -112.97

7 -104.58

11 -96.24

15 -104.62

5.1.4.3 Fuselage Shear Flow

Shear Flow by Change in Stringer Load between Adjacent Stations, ∆P Method.

The shear flow will be calculated by considering the change in the axial load in the

longitudinal stringers between fuselage sections at station (O) and (30). As the cross

section is the same between station (O) and (30) so the calculation is simplified. Table

5.4 show the calculation for the flexural shear system.

Table 5.4 Flexural shear system

Stif

no

Area

0

Area

30

Arm

0

Arm

30 𝝈𝒃 0 𝝈𝒃 30

𝑷𝑿=

𝝈𝒃 ×

𝒂 (O)

𝑷𝑿=

𝝈𝒃 ×

𝒂 (30)

∆𝒑

/𝟑𝟎

Panel

Taper

corr, K

∆𝑷𝑲

/𝟑𝟎

Shear

flow

1 0.01 0.01 3.54 1.62 -969.78 -351.21 -9.70 -3.51 0.21 0.80 0.16 0.16

2 0.01 0.01 -3.54 -1.62 969.78 351.21 9.70 3.51 -0.21 0.80 -0.16 -0.16

Since the section is symmetrical, there are no moments induced by the in-plane

component of the stringer force at station (O). By considering material as Magnesium

Alloy (HK31A-0 Sheet t=0.016 to 0.250 in) where the yield stress= 12000

Safety factor = 𝜎(𝑢𝑙𝑡𝑖𝑚𝑎𝑡𝑒) / 𝜎 𝑚𝑎𝑥

= 12000/ 969.78

= 12.37

Page 138: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

123

Table 5.5 Physical properties

MS = SF-1

= 12.37 -1

= 11.37 (Approved)

5.1.5 Structural Analysis

The fuselage is been fabricated by the foam and the value of characteristic is

based on the test that been run to get the exact result. This physical properties, is

needed because the FEM Analysis of the fuselage is based on the material properties.

The contour lines represent a typical von Mises stress distribution along the solid.

Table 5.6 Component Weight

Component Part Weight(kg) Weight(N)

Tail 0.41 4.02

Wing 0.9 8.83

Fuselage 0.46 4.51

Overall Fuselage 3.3 32.36

Every component part of weight is been setup as a load at their location on the

fuselage and the value is from the weight of the part because this is static analysis.

Firstly, we need to setup the meshing size at 0.779 in size to ensure the FEM Analysis

can been proceed. The mesh is more precise when in small size.

Physical

Properties Test Method Units Test Results

Density ASTM-D3575 Grams/Litre 20

Compressive Strength

ASTM-D3575 Mpa 0.31

Tensile Strength ASTM-D3575 Mpa 0.26

Flexural Strength ASTM-D790 Mpa 0.21

Flexural Modulus ASTM-D790 Mpa 9.6

Page 139: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

124

Figure 5.6 Component weight

Figure 5.7 Side view

Page 140: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

125

Figure 5.8 Component weight

Figure 5.9 Isometric view

Figure 5.10 Bottom part of fuselage

The maximum value of stress is at the bottom part of the fuselage with 16.66

pa where the location of the both landing gear attachment with the fuselage. The wing

Page 141: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

126

and tail value with 8.83 and 4.02 respectively is not show any harmful effect toward

the surface of the fuselage where the pressure is just around 8 to 12 Pa.

5.1.6 Compressive- Buckling Analysis

The equation for elastic instability of flat sheet in compression is,

where,

Kc = buckling coefficient which is referred to graph of compressive-buckling

coefficient for flat rectangular plate in Bruhn.

E = modulus of elasticity

v = elastic poisson’s ratio

b= short dimension of plate

t= sheet thickness

5.1.6.1 Former Structure

The aspect ratio is,

𝑎

𝑏 =

168

94 = 1.78

From graph compressive-buckling coefficient for flat rectangular plate,

Kc = 5.8

The critical elastic compression buckling stress,

𝜎= 𝜋2(5.8)(4×109 )

12(1−0.252)(

3×10−3

94×10−3 )2

= 21.446 MPa

Page 142: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

127

Then safety factor,

SF= (critical buckling stress

maximum stress) = (

21.446

16.6) = 1.29 Mpa

Margin of Safety,

MS= SF -1 = 0.29

Since the buckling stress is 21.446 MPa which is greater than the maximum stress

experience by the structure, which is 16.6 MPa. Thus, the formers structure will not

buckle. The positive value of margin of safety shows that the structure is safe.

5.1.6.2 Bulkhead Structure

The aspect ratio is,

𝑎

𝑏 =

100

100 = 1

From graph compressive-buckling coefficient for flat rectangular plate,

Kc = 6

The critical elastic compression buckling stress,

𝜎= 𝜋2(6)(4×109 )

12(1−0.252)(

3×10−3

100×10−3 )2

= 18.9496 MPa

Then safety factor,

SF= (critical buckling stress

maximum stress) = (

18.9496

16.6) = 1.14 Mpa

Margin of Safety,

MS= SF -1 = 0.14

Page 143: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

128

Since the buckling stress is 18.9496 MPa which is greater than the maximum stress

experience by the structure, which is 16.6 MPa. Thus, the formers structure will not

buckle. The positive value of margin of safety shows that the structure is safe.

5.1.7 Shear- Buckling Analysis

The above equation shows the critical elastic shear buckling stress for flat plates with

various boundary conditions.

Ks = shear buckling coefficient from graph of shear-buckling stress coefficient of

plates in Bruhn

E = modulus of elasticity

v= elastic poisson’s ratio

b= short dimension of plate

t= sheet thickness

5.1.7.1 Former Structure

The aspect ratio is,

𝑎

𝑏 =

168

94 = 1.78

From graph shear-buckling stress coefficient for flat rectangular plate,

Ks = 6.7

The critical elastic shear buckling stress,

𝜎= 𝜋2(6.7)(4×109 )

12(1−0.252)(

3×10−3

94×10−3 )2

= 23.9480 MPa

Page 144: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

129

Then safety factor,

SF= (critical buckling stress

maximum stress) = (

23.9480

16.6) = 1.44 Mpa

Margin of Safety,

MS= SF -1 = 0.44

Since the shear buckling stress is 23.9480 MPa which is greater than the maximum

shear stress experience by the structure, which is 16.6 MPa. Thus, the formers structure

will not buckle. The positive value of margin of safety shows that the structure is safe.

5.1.7.2 Bulkhead Structure

The aspect ratio is,

𝑎

𝑏 =

100

100 = 1

From graph shear-buckling coefficient for flat rectangular plate,

Kc = 9.8

The critical elastic shear buckling stress,

𝜎= 𝜋2(9.8)(4×109 )

12(1−0.252)(

3×10−3

100×10−3 )2

= 30.9511 MPa

Then safety factor,

SF= (critical buckling stress

maximum stress) = (

18.9496

16.6) = 1.14 Mpa

Margin of Safety,

MS= SF -1 = 0.14

Page 145: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

130

Since the shear buckling stress is 18.9496 MPa which is greater than the maximum

stress experience by the structure, which is 16.6 MPa. Thus, the bulkhead will not

buckle. The positive value of margin of safety shows that the structure is safe.

5.2 Landing Gear

5.2.1 Main landing gear simulation analysis

The Solidworks 3D model is used to create this simulation analysis. However,

a precaution is to ensure the consistency in the unit’s system. Throughout the

simulation, we will adopt the International System of Units (SI) unit system. Selecting

a material requests a lot of investigation in their physical properties, i.e. strength,

ductility, corrosion resistance. Based on the findings, the main landing gear is made of

stainless steel.

In structural analysis, boundary conditions are applied to those regions of the

model where the displacements and/or rotations are known. Such regions may be

constrained to remain fixed (have zero displacements and/or rotation) during the

simulation or may have specified, non-zero displacement and/or rotation. A mesh is a

physical discretization of a domain existing in one, two or three dimensions. Higher

quality mesh is synonymous with smaller mesh. It can often be achieved with careful

partitioning and edge seeds.

Page 146: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

131

5.2.2 Rear landing gear simulation analysis

Figure 5.11 Rear landing gear

Table 5.7 Volumetric properties

Volumetric Properties

Mass:0.00584563 kg

Volume:7.4944e-007 m^3

Density:7800 kg/m^3

Weight:0.0572872 N

Table 5.8 Material properties

Page 147: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

132

Table 5.9 Load and fixtures detail of rear landing gear

Table 5.9 shows the fixed part will be at the place where tyre will be attached and the

the force will be added at part where the landing gear is attached to the fuselage.

Table 5.10 Reaction forces and moments

Study Results

The coloured and contoured von Mises stress result helps to identify where is

the most critical part and which part might require strength-enhancement. The stress

result indicates that maximum magnitude is located at the holes which will be attached

to the tyres. In order to further improve the structural, its diameter need to be made

thicker. Other than that, the green area also shown the higher stress.

Boundary condition for rear landing gear is crucial. In our case, we just

considered the analysis is static deformation. The boundary condition of the bottom

Page 148: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

133

part is fixed in displacement and rotation in the analysis. Besides, only the y-direction

of displacement will vary with the loading for the upper part which attached to the

fuselage. Below figures shows all the analysis including static stress, static

displacement and static strain.

Figure 5.12 Static stress

Page 149: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

134

Figure 5.13 Static displacement

Figure 5.14 Static strain

Page 150: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

135

5.2.3 Front landing gear simulation analysis

Figure 5.15 Front landing gear

Table 5.11 Volumetric properties

Volumetric Properties

Mass:0.283454 kg

Volume:3.54318e-005 m^3

Density:8000 kg/m^3

Weight:2.77785 N

Table 5.12 Material properties

Page 151: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

136

Table 5.13 Load and fixtures detail of front landing gear

Fixture name Fixture Image Fixture Details

Fixed-1

Entities: 2 edge(s), 4 face(s)

Type: Fixed Geometry

Load name Load Image Load Details

Force-1

Entities: 1 face(s)

Type: Apply normal

force

Value: 33 N

Table 5.14 Simulation results of front landing gear

Components X Y Z Resultant

Reaction force(N) -0.248924 -0.00208807 33.0006 33.0016

Reaction Moment(N.m) 0 0 0 0

In table 5.13 shows the fixed part will be at the place where tyre will be attached and

the the force will be added at part where the landing gear is attached to the fuselage is

displayed in table 5.14.

Study Results

The coloured and contoured von Mises stress result helps to identify where is

the most critical part and which part might require strength-enhancement. The stress

result indicates that maximum magnitude is located at the holes which will be attached

to the tyres. In order to further improve the structural, its diameter need to be made

thicker. Other than that, the green area also shown the higher stress.

Page 152: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

137

In our case, we just considered the analysis is static deformation. The

boundary condition of the bottom part is fixed in displacement and rotation in the

analysis. Besides, only the y-direction of displacement will vary with the loading for

the upper part which attached to the fuselage. Below figures shows all the analysis

including static stress, static displacement and static strain.

Figure 5.16 Static Stress

Figure 5.17 Static strain

Page 153: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

138

5.2.4 Discussion

Tailwheel, or conventional landing gear, is a term referencing the

undercarriage of an aircraft consisting of two wheels positioned forward of the center

of gravity. A small skid or wheel is located at the tail of the aircraft to support the tail.

The aviation term tail dragger is another common term for tailwheel aircraft, also

known as the conventional gear fd configuration. This is considered “conventional”

because traditionally aircraft were configured only with tailwheel; tricycle gear had

not yet been invented.

There are many advantages in the tailwheel aircraft that are not seen in tricycle

gear configuration. Thanks to smaller tires, the induced drag on the aircraft is lower

for the same power settings. Most tailwheel aircraft are cheaper to buy and maintain

in comparison to nosewheel airplanes. Tailwheel aircraft are also easy to handle and

manoeuvre on the ground thanks to its lightweight tail which can release and free-

caster, allowing 'flat spins', something tricycle gear planes can't do! With the nose

high attitude of a tailwheel airplane, less chips and stone damage occur due to the

increased propeller clearance with the ground. There are certainly benefits to a

taildragger, as well. The nose-high attitude on the ground means that the propellers on

tailwheel aircraft often have more clearance from the ground. The extra clearance

makes these aircraft better suited for grass or dirt runways.The tailwheel craft is often

designed and configured for slow flight. This slower speed makes them easier to land

on short runways. Many are high-design and better suited for backcountry flying than

nosewheel aircraft are. These are the reasons we chosen taildragger landing gear in our

aircraft.

Page 154: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

139

CHAPTER 6

EMPENNAGE ANALYSIS

6.1 Introduction

The empennage is the whole tail unit at the extreme rear of the fuselage and it

provides the stability and directional control of the aircraft (Fig 6.1). Structurally, the

empennage consists of the entire tail assembly, including the vertical stabiliser,

horizontal stabilisers, rudder, elevators, and the rear section of the fuselage to which

they are attached. The stabilisers are fixed wing sections which provide stability for

the aircraft to keep it flying straight. The horizontal stabiliser prevents the up-and-

down, or pitching, motion of the aircraft nose. The rudder is used to control yaw, which

is the side-to-side movement of the aircraft nose. The elevator is the small moving

section at the rear of the horizontal stabiliser used to generate and control the pitching

motion. The loads on the rudder and elevator are smaller than those acting on the

vertical and horizontal stabilisers, although properties such as stiffness, strength and

toughness are still critically important.

Figure 6.1 Structural configuration of the empennage

Page 155: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

140

6.2 Preliminary Horizontal and Vertical Tail Sizing

Information such as location of the centre of gravity(c.g.) of airplane, shift in

(c.g). location during flight and the desirable level of stability are needed to fulfil the

requirements of proper horizontal and vertical tail surfaces design. However, to obtain

the (c.g). location, the weights of horizontal and vertical stabilizer are needed which

depend on their size. Hence, preliminary sizing of the two stabilizers are carried out

with the help of the following steps. To do so, our design mission which is carrying a

500g payload by means of an unmanned aerial aircraft (UAV) that utilises single motor

operated engine driven propellers together with the gross weight of the entire aircraft

has been taken into consider while designing both the sizing of the tails.

6.2.1 Choice of Empennage Shape

The conventional configuration with a low horizontal tail is a natural choice

since roots of both horizontal and vertical surfaces are conveniently attached directly

to the fuselage. In this design, the effectiveness of the vertical tail is large because

interference with the fuselage and horizontal tail increase its effective aspect ratio.

Large areas of the stabilizer are affected by the converging fuselage flow, however,

which can reduce the local dynamic pressure. The design of the structure is shown in

Figure 6.2.

Figure 6.2 Tail configuration of our design

Page 156: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

141

6.2.2 Horizontal and Vertical Stabilizer Sizing

Basically, prior to the horizontal and vertical tail sizing, the first step needs to

be determined was the careful selection of the airfoil as elevator and rudder are

attached to the surface to provide stability controls. The elevator and rudder have

deflections on both sides of the undeflected positions. Hence, horizontal and vertical

stabilizer invariably have symmetric airfoil sections. National Advisory Commilis for

Aeronautica (NACA) generated a large amount of data on the aerodynamic

characteristics (Cl vs α, Cα vs Cl and Cm vs Cl) at different Reynolds numbers. Hence,

the airfoils which are commonly used for stabilizer of airplanes flying at low and

medium subsonic Mach numbers is NACA 0012. Upon selection of the NACA the

stabilizer sizing is further processed by means of determining the dimensions of the

both tails. These parameters are determined based on the current design available of

the commercial aircraft that utilises the application of single piston operated engine

driven propellers. Even though, our design is mainly concentrated on UAV aircraft but

the application of the operation is almost similar to the single piston operated engine

driven propellers. The dimensions and sizing of the horizontal and vertical stabilizer

are as shown in Table 6.1 and Table 6.2 and are as follows:

Table 6.1 NACA 0012 horizontal stabilizer dimensions and sizing

Chord 0.21 m

Span 0.6 m

Tail Area 0.6 × 0.21 = 0.126𝑚2

Aspect Ratio 0.62

0.126 = 2.86

Aerodynamic Centre (A.C) 1

4×chord =

1

4×0.21m = 0.05 m

Centre of Gravity (C.G) 0.48 m from the centre of the propeller

Horizontal Tail Weight

Area of Tail × Maximum Thickness of Chord

× Density of Foam(EPP)

= 0.13 × 0.0252 × 20.8 = 0.07kg

Maximum Coefficient of Lift

(Based on Airfoil Generator) 1.1 at 14°

Page 157: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

142

Table 6.2 NACA 0012 vertical stabilizer dimensions and sizing

Chord 0.16 m

Span 0.27 m

Tail Area 0.16 × 0.27 = 0.04 𝑚2

Aspect Ratio 0.272

0.04 = 1.69

Aerodynamic Centre (A.C) 1

4×chord =

1

4×0.16m = 0.04 m

Centre of Gravity (C.G) 1.02 m from the centre of the propeller

Vertical Tail Weight

Area of Tail × Maximum Thickness of Chord

× Density of Foam(EPP)

= 0.04 × 0.0192 × 20.8 = 0.02𝑘𝑔

Maximum Coefficient of Lift

(Based on Airfoil Generator) 1.1 at 14°

6.2.3 Theoretical Analysis of Horizontal and Vertical Stabilizers

The theoretical analysis of horizontal and vertical stabilizer is mainly

emphasized on determining the effectiveness of both the surfaces as well as strength

of the materials that are used to design the components. The following parts explains

the ways on how such theoretical analysis are being approached which are as follows:

6.2.3.1 Horizontal and Vertical Stabilizer Effectiveness

In order to analyse theoretically the effectiveness of the horizontal and vertical

stabilizers, they are different types of methods and approaches are being carried out.

One of the best methods that could almost estimate the effectiveness of the stabilizers

is by calculating the tail volume ratios of both horizontal and vertical stabilizers. The

method of solution are as follows:

Page 158: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

143

Figure 6.3 Calculation on effectiveness of horizontal stabilizer

L = 3

4× wing chord + 0.39 +

1

4tail chord

= (3

4× 0.28) + 0.39 + (

1

4× 0.21) = 0.6525 m

D = 0.6525 ×0.126

0.392+0.126 =0.158716 m

MAC = 0.28m (since the wing is rectangular)

Safety Margin: 0.28

10 = 0.028 m (distance between the Cg and NP)

Horizontal Tail Volume Ratio = 0.126×(0.6525−0.158716+0.028)

0.392×0.28

= 0.50

To justify the results obtained above, the following extraction of the Table 6.3

from the sources (Priyanka Barua, Tahir Sousa & Dieter Scholz,2013) is referred. The

details of the table are as follows:

Page 159: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

144

Table 6.3 Suggestions for tail volume ratio of horizontal tail by various authors

(Raymer 1992, Jenkinson 1999, Roskam 1985, Torenbeek 1982, Nicolai 1975,

Schaufele 2007)

Based on the table above, by referring to the Raymer 1992 sources, the tail

volume ratio for the horizontal stabilizer which is 0.5 is much reasonable and effective

as it can be compared from the table above under the civil propeller aircraft type and

the category of homebuilt where homebuilt can be defined an amateur-built aircraft or

kit planes that are constructed by persons for whom this is not a professional activity.

Figure 6.4 Calculation on effectiveness of vertical stabilizer

L: 1.07 − 0.43 − 3

4×0.16m = 0.52m

Vertical Tail Volume Ratio= (0.16×0.27)×0.52

0.392 ×1.4

= 0.04

Page 160: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

145

To justify the results obtained above, the following extraction of the Table 6.4

from the sources (Priyanka Barua, Tahir Sousa & Dieter Scholz,2013) is referred. The

details of the table are as follows:

Table 6.4 Suggestions for tail volume ratio of vertical tail by various authors (Raymer

1992, Jenkinson 1999, Roskam 1985, Torenbeek 1982, Nicolai 1975, Schaufele 2007)

Based on the table above, by referring to the Raymer 1992 sources, the tail

volume ratio for the vertical stabilizer which is 0.04 is much reasonable and effective

as it can be compared from the table above under the civil propeller aircraft type and

the category of homebuilt.

6.2.3.2 Horizontal and Vertical Stabilizer Strength

Upon completion of a proper sizing of the stabilizers based on the available

criteria, the strength of the stabilizers is also need to be theoretically determined for

the proper material selection of the design which depends on the physical and

mechanical properties of the materials. Hence, this can be achieved by comparing the

local stresses of the stabilizers at cruising speed by the different load factor such as G

= -1.5, 1 and 3.0. The lift is assumed to be equal to the gross weight of the aircraft due

to the calculations are made at cruising speed. The graphs of three load factors are

plotted and shear and bending stresses are calculated as follows:

Page 161: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

146

Horizontal Stabilizer Strength

𝐆 = −𝟏. 𝟓 𝐚𝐭 𝐜𝐫𝐮𝐬𝐢𝐧𝐠 𝐬𝐩𝐞𝐞𝐝

Figure 6.5 Lift distribution of the front view of the tail plane at G =-1.5

Figure 6.6 Shear and bending moment diagram at G = -1.5

L = W

L = (0.07) kg × 9.81 = 0.6867 𝑁

Since Lift Distribution of the Horizontal Tail = 0.6867

0.6 =1.1445 N/m

Page 162: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

147

𝐆 = 𝟏. 𝟎 𝐚𝐭 𝐜𝐫𝐮𝐬𝐢𝐧𝐠 𝐬𝐩𝐞𝐞𝐝

Figure 6.7 Lift distribution of the front view of the tail plane at G = 1.0

Figure 6.8 Shear and bending moment diagram at G = 1.0

Page 163: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

148

𝐆 = 𝟑. 𝟎 𝐚𝐭 𝐜𝐫𝐮𝐬𝐢𝐧𝐠 𝐬𝐩𝐞𝐞𝐝

Figure 6.9 Lift distribution of the front view of the tail plane at G = 3.0

Figure 6.10 Shear and bending moment diagram at G = 3.0

Page 164: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

149

To determine the structural integrity of the horizontal stabilizer as well as

selection of a proper materials that suits the plan, it is vital to calculate the load factors

at different flight conditions in order to determine the limits of the flying qualities.

This can be achieved by means of estimating “limit load factors” in which the problem

of load factors in airplane design then reduces to that of determining the highest load

factors that can be expected in normal operation under various operational situations.

For the reasons of safety, it is required that the airplane be designed to withstand these

load factors without any structural damage.

To do so, Figure 6.6, Figure 6.8 and Figure 6.10 are plotted to determine the

maximum stresses of the structures at different flight conditions. From the graphs of

shear and bending moment diagram above we can deduce that the shear force can be

mathematically expressed as 272.5Pa ≤ τ ≤ 1.36KPa whereas the bending moment

is 60.08KPa ≤ σ ≤ 510.74KPa . Hence, for a safe flight such amounts of forces

should hold the shear and bending stresses of the stabilizers without damaging the

structures. This in turn leads to a proper selection of materials as our design of

stabilizers are constructed using the EPP foam. To determine whether the structures

can withstand above stresses, the buckling stresses under shear and bending loads of

the selected material, EPP Foam at a density of 20.8𝑘𝑔

𝑚3 is calculated based on the

available data of the selected material. The calculation of the buckling under shear and

bending loads are as follows:

Collection of variables (refer Appendix, Appendix P-K)

E = 79.67Mpa ; ν = 0.001 (variables are interpolated based on Appendix L)

F0.7 = 400KPa ( based on Appendix K)

Calculation of buckling stress under shear and bending loads

Page 165: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

150

Figure 6.11 Free body diagram of stabilizer under shear and bending conditions

Buckling under bending loads

𝐹𝑏𝑒𝑛𝑑𝑖𝑛𝑔,𝑏 =𝐾𝑏 𝜋2𝐸

12(1 − 𝑣2)(

𝑡

𝑏)2

=Kbπ2(79.67 × 106 )

12(1 − (0.001)2)(

0.006

0.3)2

= Kb(26.21 × 103 )

𝑎

𝑏=

0.1(one equal portion)

6 × 10−3

= 16.67

𝐾𝑏 = 24.4

𝐹𝑏 = 24.4(26.21 × 103 )

Plastic Correction;

𝐹𝑏

𝐹0.7=

639.52 × 103

400 × 103

= 1.6

Based on Appendix O;

𝐹𝑏

𝐹0.7= 1.0

𝐹𝑏 = 1.0 × 400 × 103

= 400 kPa

Page 166: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

151

The buckling stress due to bending loads calculated is for one portion only.

Since the stabilizer is divided into three equal portions the total buckling stress can be

sum up as follows:

Fb = 3 × 400 kPa

= 1.2 MPa

Buckling under shear loads

𝐹𝑠ℎ𝑒𝑎𝑟,𝑠 =𝐾𝑠𝜋2𝐸

12(1 − 𝑣2)(

𝑡

𝑏)2

=Ksπ2(79.67 × 106)

12(1 − (0.001)2)(0.006

0.21)2

= Ks(53.49 × 103)

𝑎

𝑏=

0.03(one equal portion)

6 × 10−3

= 5

𝐾𝑠 = 5.6

𝐹𝑠 = 5.6(53.49 × 103)

Plastic Correction;

𝐹𝑠

𝐹0.7=

316.34 × 103

400 × 103

= 0.79

Based on Figure Appendix P;

𝐹𝑠

𝐹0.7= 0.79

𝐹𝑠 = 0.79 × 400 × 103

= 316 kPa

Page 167: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

152

The buckling stress due to shear loads calculated is for one portion only. Since

the stabilizer is divided into three equal portions the total buckling stress can be sum

up as follows:

Fs = 7 × 316 kPa

= 2.21 MPa

Comparison between theoretical results with buckling stress under shear and

bending loads for Horizontal Stabilizer

As discussed in earlier part on the mathematical expression of the shear and

bending stresses on the stabilizers, we can make a prediction that the maximum shear

force acting on the surface is 1.36 kPa in which is lower that the buckling stress under

shear loading which is 2.21MPa. On the other hand, while looking on the bending

stress, the maximum bending stress acting on the surface is 510.74 kPa which is also

lower to the buckling stress acting on the surface due to bending loading which is

1.2MPa. Hence, from this comparison we could predict in terms of structural integrity

that the structure can manage to sustain both the shear and bending loading acting on

the surface of stabilizers at different load factors as discussed in earlier part.

Besides that, to measure of how well a material can withstand the effects

of tearing, the calculated tearing stresses for different flight conditions are compared

with the tear strength. The following steps will explain how to determine the tearing

stress. These are as follows:

Tear Strength =Distributed Lift Force(N)

Thickness of Foam(m)

Tear strength =1.445

0.006 for G = 1.0

By approaching above formula, the tear stresses at different load factors can be

mathematically expressed as 190.75𝑁

𝑚≤ Tear Strength ≤ 572.25

𝑁

𝑚. Based on the

table, the tear strength at 20.8𝑘𝑔

𝑚3 is 1.77kPa. Thus, the calculated values of tear stresses

are not exceeding the expected tear strength.

Page 168: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

153

Vertical Stabilizer Strength

𝐆 = −𝟏. 𝟓 𝐚𝐭 𝐜𝐫𝐮𝐬𝐢𝐧𝐠 𝐬𝐩𝐞𝐞𝐝

Figure 6.12 Lift distribution of the Horizontally Projected Vertical Stabilizer at G = -1.5

Figure 6.13 Shear and bending moment diagram at G = -1.5

L = W

L = (0.02) kg × 9.81 = 0.1962 N

Since Lift Distribution of the vertical tail = 0.1962

0.27 =0.7267 N/m

Page 169: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

154

𝐆 = 𝟏. 𝟎 𝐚𝐭 𝐜𝐫𝐮𝐬𝐢𝐧𝐠 𝐬𝐩𝐞𝐞𝐝

Figure 6.14 Lift distribution of the Horizontally Projected Vertical Stabilizer at G = 1.0

Figure 6.15 Shear and bending moment diagram at G = 1.0

Page 170: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

155

𝐆 = 𝟑. 𝟎 𝐚𝐭 𝐜𝐫𝐮𝐬𝐢𝐧𝐠 𝐬𝐩𝐞𝐞𝐝

Figure 6.16 Lift distribution of Horizontally Projected Vertical Stabilizer at G = 3.0

Figure 6.17 Shear and bending moment diagram at G = 3.0

Page 171: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

156

To determine the structural integrity of the vertical stabilizers as well as

selection of a proper materials that suits the plan, it is vital to calculate the load factors

at different flight conditions in order to determine the limits of the flying qualities.

This can be achieved by means of estimating “limit load factors” in which the problem

of load factors in airplane design then reduces to that of determining the highest load

factors that can be expected in normal operation under various operational situations.

For the reasons of safety, it is required that the airplane be designed to withstand these

load factors without any structural damage.

To do so, Figure 6.13, Figure 6.15 and Figure 6.17 are plotted to determine the

maximum stresses of the structures at different flight conditions. From the graphs of

shear and bending moment diagram above we can deduce that the shear force can be

mathematically expressed as 102.19Pa ≤ τ ≤ 510.96Pa whereas the bending

moment is 17.17KPa ≤ σ ≤ 145.93KPa. Hence, for a safe flight such amounts of

forces should hold the shear and bending stresses of the stabilizers without damaging

the structures. This in turn leads to a proper selection of materials as our design of

stabilizers are constructed using the EPP foam. To determine whether the structures

can withstand above stresses, the buckling stresses under shear and bending loads of

the selected material, EPP Foam at a density of 20.8𝑘𝑔

𝑚3 is calculated based on the

available data of the selected material. The calculation of the buckling under shear and

bending loads are as follows:

Collection of variables (refer Appendix P - K)

E = 79.67Mpa ; ν = 0.001 (variables are interpolated based on Appendix L)

F0.7 = 400KPa ( based on Appendix L)

Calculation of buckling stress under shear and bending loads

Page 172: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

157

Figure 6.18 Free body diagram of stabilizer under shear and bending conditions

Buckling under bending loads

𝐹𝑏𝑒𝑛𝑑𝑖𝑛𝑔,𝑏 =𝐾𝑏 𝜋2𝐸

12(1 − 𝑣2)(

𝑡

𝑏)2

=Kbπ2(79.67 × 106 )

12(1 − (0.001)2)(

0.006

0.27)2

= Kb(35.36 × 103 )

𝑎

𝑏=

0.03(one equal portion)

6 × 10−3

= 5

𝐾𝑏 = 26

𝐹𝑏 = 26(35.36 × 103 )

Plastic Correction;

𝐹𝑏

𝐹0.7=

919.36 × 103

400 × 103

= 2.3

Based on Appendix O;

𝐹𝑏

𝐹0.7= 1.0

𝐹𝑏 = 1.0 × 400 × 103

= 400KPa

0.27m

Page 173: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

158

The buckling stress due to bending loads calculated is for one portion only.

Since the stabilizer is divided into three equal portions the total buckling stress can be

sum up as follows:

Fb = 9 × 400 kPa

= 3.6 MPa

Buckling under shear loads

𝐹𝑠ℎ𝑒𝑎𝑟,𝑠 =𝐾𝑠𝜋2𝐸

12(1 − 𝑣2)(

𝑡

𝑏)2

=Ksπ2(79.67 × 106)

12(1 − (0.001)2)(0.006

0.16)2

= Ks(92.15 × 103)

𝑎

𝑏=

0.02(one equal portion)

6 × 10−3

= 3.33

𝐾𝑠 = 5.8

𝐹𝑠 = 5.8(92.15 × 103 )

Plastic Correction;

𝐹𝑠

𝐹0.7=

534.47 × 103

400 × 103

= 1.3

Based on Appendix P;

𝐹𝑠

𝐹0.7= 1.3

𝐹𝑠 = 1.3 × 400 × 103

= 520 kPa

Page 174: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

159

The buckling stress due to shear loads calculated is for one portion only. Since

the stabilizer is divided into three equal portions the total buckling stress can be sum

up as follows:

Fs = 8 × 520 kPa

= 4.16 MPa

Comparison between theoretical results with buckling stress under shear and

bending loads for Vertical Stabilizer

As discussed in earlier part on the mathematical expression of the shear and

bending stresses on the vertical stabilizer, we can make a prediction that the maximum

shear force acting on the surface is 510.96Pa in which is lower that the buckling stress

under shear loading which is 4.16MPa. On the other hand, while looking on the

bending stress, the maximum bending stress acting on the surface is 145.93 kPa which

is also lower to the buckling stress acting on the surface due to bending loading which

is 3.6MPa. Hence, from this comparison we could predict in terms of structural

integrity that the structure can manage to sustain both the shear and bending loading

acting on the surface of stabilizers at different load factors as discussed in earlier part.

Besides that, to measure of how well a material can withstand the effects

of tearing, the calculated tearing stresses for different flight conditions are compared

with the tear strength. The following steps will explain how to determine the tearing

stress. These are as follows:

Tear Strength =Distributed Lift Force(N)

Thickness of Foam(m)

Tear strength =0.1962

0.006 for G = 1.0

By approaching above formula, the tear stresses at different load factors can be

mathematically expressed as 181.68𝑁

𝑚≤ Tear Strength ≤ 363.35

𝑁

𝑚. Based on the

table, the tear strength at 20.8𝑘𝑔

𝑚3 is 1.77kPa. Thus, the calculated values of tear stresses

are not exceeding the expected tear strength.

Page 175: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

160

6.3 Preliminary Control Surfaces Sizing

Generally, control surfaces namely rudder and elevator are designed to

provide stability and control for the aircraft manoeuvres during flight, landing and

take-off. Hence, a proper design analysis should thoroughly emphasize to the structure

as well as selection of materials that can withstand the shear and bending stresses on

the surfaces. Based on Raymer 1992, about 90% percent of the tail span, elevators and

rudders design and construction are beginning from the side of the fuselage and extend

to the tip of the tail. Besides that, typical construction of the rudder and elevator are

about 25-50% of the tail chord due to equal distribution of lift force that could be

balanced by the hinges when the control surfaces are deflected to various angles. It is

also important that the hinge axis should not farther aft than about 20% of the average

chord of the control surfaces. For the purpose of analysis, the integrity of the structure

can be evaluated based on theoretical calculation of shear and bending stresses at

different angle of deflection of control surface as well as comparing the ability of the

structure to withstand such forces and stresses. To do so, the following design

techniques are approached that almost predict the behaviour and performance of the

control surfaces.

6.3.1 Control Surface Sizing

In designing of the control surfaces both rudder and elevator, the processes are

exactly similar as we imposed on the designing of horizontal and vertical stabilizer.

This process includes selection of airfoil in which the NACA selection should be same

as imposed on stabilizers (NACA0012) and determination of control surface sizes

based on the available current aircraft design that matches the mission of the aircraft.

However, the theoretical analysis is different since the control surfaces can deflect up

to certain angle. To ensure that the control surfaces can perform at different angle of

deflection and load factor, proper dimension or sizing of the control surfaces are vital

that have proper justification. The dimension and sizing of the control surfaces are

shown in Table 6.5 and Table 6.6 which are as follows.

Page 176: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

161

Table 6.5 NACA 0012 elevator dimensions and sizing

Chord 0.09 m

Span 0.54 m

Elevator Area 0.09 × 0.54 = 0.05𝑚2

Aspect Ratio 0.542

0.05 = 5.83

Aerodynamic Centre (A.C) 1

4×chord =

1

4× 0.09m = 0.03 m

Centre of Gravity (C.G) 1.1 m from the centre of the propeller

Elevator Weight

Area of Elevator × Maximum Thickness of Chord

× Density of Foam(EPP)

= 0.05 × 0.0252 × 20.8 = 0.03kg

Maximum Coefficient of Lift

(Based on Airfoil Generator)

1.1 at 14°

Hinge Axis Length 0.02m from the leading of elevator

Length of Rod 0.18m (between cg of horizontal stabilizer and

elevator)

Elevator chord to horizontal tail

chord Ratio 0.45

Maximum angle of deflection ±25°

Page 177: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

162

Table 6.6 NACA 0012 rudder dimensions and sizing

Chord 0.08 m

Span 0.24 m

Rudder Area 0.08 × 0.24 = 0.02 𝑚2

Aspect Ratio 0.242

0.02 = 2.88

Aerodynamic Centre (A.C) 1

4×chord =

1

4×0.08m = 0.02 m

Centre of Gravity (C.G) 1.00 m from the centre of the propeller

Rudder Weight Area of rudder × Maximum Thickness of Chord

× Density of Foam(EPP)

= 0.02 × 0.0192 × 20.8 = 0.007𝑘𝑔

Maximum Coefficient of Lift

(Based on Airfoil Generator)

1.1 at 14°

Hinge Axis Length 0.02m from the leading of rudder

Length of Rod 0.12m (between cg of vertical stabilizer and

rudder)

Rudder chord to vertical tail

chord Ratio

0.47

Maximum angle of deflection ±25°

Based on the Table 6.5 and Table 6.6, the values for the chord can be

determined by referring to Table 6.7 and Table 6.8 below.

Page 178: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

163

Table 6.7 Suggestions for C_E/C_H as given by various authors (Roskam 1985,

Schaufele 2007, Torenbeek 1982 and Sadraey 2013)

Table 6.8 Suggestions for the C_R/C_V as given by various authors ((Roskam

1985, Schaufele 2007, Torenbeek 1982 and Sadraey 2013)

From the tables above, the length of chord for elevator (0.09m) and rudder

(0.08m) can be obtained by calculating the ratio between the control surfaces over

stabilizers. To do so, the ratio between the control surfaces over stabilizers are set to

the average values as shown from the reference above which are 0.45(elevator) and

0.47(Rudder) for the homebuilt aircraft category based on Roskam 1985. On the other

hand, from the reference of Raymer 1992 about 90% percent of the tail span, elevators

and rudders design and construction are beginning from the side of the fuselage and

Page 179: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

164

extend to the tip of the tail. Hence, by mathematically express the statement (20%×tail

chord), we can obtain the value for the elevator and rudder span which are 0.54m for

elevator and 0.24m for rudder respectively. The hinge distance for the elevator and

rudder to assemble with its horizontal and vertical stabilizers are also calculated by

20%× chord length of the control surfaces where the values from the control surfaces

leading edges are depicted as in Table 6.19 and Table 6.20.

6.3.2 Theoretical Analysis of Control Surfaces

The theoretical analysis of control surfaces is mainly emphasized on

determining the amount of lift created at various angle of attack and the torque/moment

generated can be withstand by the servo motor. The following parts explains the ways

on how such theoretical analysis are being approached which are as follows:

6.3.2.1 Theoretical Lift calculation at different angle of deflection

The purpose of this analysis is to determine the maximum lift generated by

control surfaces at an angle of attack. This will ensure that the maximum force can be

withstand by the servo motor torque especially during take-off and landing. The

analysis of lift is mainly determined by the spanwise distribution of lift of both elevator

and rudder and the angle of deflection is limited to 25°. These steps of the calculations

are as follows:

Figure 6.19 Velocity profile of the rudder and elevator as view from sideview

Page 180: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

165

Figure 6.20 Resultant aerodynamic force and the components into which its splits

In order to obtain the lift at different angle of attack, the cross section of the

control surface and free body diagram are drawn which are shown in Figure 6.19 and

Figure 6.20. To calculate the lift force and coefficient of lift, the following formulae

are used.

(I) Calculations on Spanwise distribution of lift at different angle of attack

The geometrical relation between these two sets of components as referred Figure

6.20 is as follows:

L = N cos𝛼 − A sinα

To obtained the normal force(N) and axial force(A), the following formula is

used:

N = − ∫ (𝑝𝑢𝑝𝑝𝑒𝑟 cosθ + 𝜏𝑢𝑝𝑝𝑒𝑟 sinθ)𝑑𝑆𝑢𝑝𝑝𝑒𝑟 + ∫ (𝑝𝑙𝑜𝑤𝑒𝑟cosθ − 𝜏𝑙𝑜𝑤𝑒𝑟sinθ)𝑑𝑆𝑙𝑜𝑤𝑒𝑟

𝑇𝐸

𝐿𝐸

TE

LE

A = ∫ (−𝑝𝑢𝑝𝑝𝑒𝑟 sinθ + 𝜏𝑢𝑝𝑝𝑒𝑟 cosθ)𝑑𝑆𝑢𝑝𝑝𝑒𝑟 + ∫ (𝑝𝑙𝑜𝑤𝑒𝑟sinθ + 𝜏𝑙𝑜𝑤𝑒𝑟cosθ)𝑑𝑆𝑙𝑜𝑤𝑒𝑟

𝑇𝐸

𝐿𝐸

TE

LE

In which;

𝑝 = pressure of upper and lower surface of the airfoil

𝜏 = shear stress of the upper and lower surface of the airfoil

Page 181: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

166

Sample calculations for elevator at 𝟓°

The geometrical relations for the integration of pressure and shear stress

distributions over a two-dimensional body surface of elevator is shown in Figure 6.21.

Figure 6.21 Integration of pressure and shear stress distributions over a two-

dimensional body surface of elevator

To obtain the normal force, the values of pressure, shear stress and angle are

obtained as follows:

Angle , θ = tan−13 × 10−3

0.09= 1.9°

Based on the elevation of our aircraft (10m) the following parameters are

calculated by interpolating the atmospheric tables.

Pressure , plower and pupper = 1.01 × 105 Pa

Temperature , T = 288.09K

Density , ρ = 1.224kg /𝑚3

Dynamic viscocity, μ = 1.78869 × 10−5𝑁𝑠/𝑚2

Freestream velocity,𝑈∞ =0.2

√1.4×287×288.15= 68.059m/s

Page 182: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

167

Based on Figure 6.19, the shear stress is calculated as follows:

τupper surface = τlower surface = μdu

dy

= (1.78869 × 10−5) (𝑈∞

0.025𝑐)

= (1.78869 × 10−5) (68.059

0.025(0.09))

= 0.54105Pa

N = − ∫ ((1.01 × 105 )cos1.9° + (0.5411)sin1.9°)𝑑𝑆𝑢𝑝𝑝𝑒𝑟 0.09

0

+ ∫ ((1.01 × 105 )cos1.9° − (0.5411)sin1.9°)𝑑𝑆𝑙𝑜𝑤𝑒𝑟

0.09

0

= -3.229× 10−3N

A = ∫ ((−1.01 × 105)sin1 .9° + (0.5411) cos1.9°)𝑑𝑆𝑢𝑝𝑝𝑒𝑟

0.09

0

+ ∫ ((1.01 × 105 )sin1.9° + (0.5411)cos1.9°)𝑑𝑆𝑙𝑜𝑤𝑒𝑟

0.09

0

=97.336 × 10−3N

L = (−3.229 × 10−3) cos(5°) − ( 97.336 × 10−3) sin(5°)

= −0.0117N

Sample calculation for rudder at 𝟓°

To obtain the normal force, the values of pressure, shear stress and angle are

obtained as follows:

Angle , θ = tan−13 × 10−3

0.08= 2.1°

Based on the elevation of our aircraft(10m) the following parameters are

calculated by interpolating the atmospheric tables.

Page 183: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

168

Pressure , plower and pupper = 1.01 × 105 Pa

Temperature , T = 288.09K

Density , ρ = 1.224kg /𝑚3

Kinematic viscocity, υ = 1.78869 × 10−5𝑁𝑠/𝑚2

Freestream velocity,𝑈∞ =0.2

√1.4×287×288.15= 68.059m/s

Based on Figure 6.19, the shear stress is calculated as follows:

τupper surface = τlower surface = μdu

dy

= (1.78869 × 10−5) (𝑈∞

0.025𝑐)

= (1.78869 × 10−5) (68.059

0.025(0.08))

= 0.6087Pa

N = − ∫ ((1.01 × 105)cos2.1° + (0.6087)sin2 .1°)𝑑𝑆𝑢𝑝𝑝𝑒𝑟

0.08

0

+ ∫ ((1.01 × 105)cos2.1° − (0.6087)sin2 .1°)𝑑𝑆𝑙𝑜𝑤𝑒𝑟

0.08

0

= −3.5690 × 10−3N

A = ∫ ((−1.01 × 105 )sin2.1° + (0.6087)cos2.1°)𝑑𝑆𝑢𝑝𝑝𝑒𝑟

0.08

0

+ ∫ ((1.01 × 105)sin2.1° − (0.6087)cos2.1°)𝑑𝑆𝑙𝑜𝑤𝑒𝑟

0.08

0

= 97.327 × 10−3N

L = (−3.5690 × 10−3 ) cos(5°) − ( 97.327 × 10−3 ) sin(5°)

= −0.0044N

Page 184: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

169

(II) Lift coefficient at different angle of attack

The lift coefficient can be obtained based on the classical thin airfoil theory:

the symmetrical airfoil. To do so, the following formulae is used to determine

theoretically which is as follows:

Sample calculations for elevator at 𝟓°

𝐶𝐿 = 2𝜋 (5 ×𝜋

180) = 0.1097

Sample calculation for rudder at 𝟓°

𝐶𝐿 = 2𝜋 (5 ×𝜋

180) = 0.1097

Velocity at different angle of attack

Sample calculations for elevator at 𝟓°

𝑉 = √2(0.0053)

(1.224)(0.05)(0.5483)

𝑉 = 0.5603

Sample calculation for rudder at 𝟓°

V = √2(0.0049)

(1.224) (0.24)(0.5483)

𝑉 = 0.8568 m/s

𝐶𝐿 = 2𝜋𝛼

𝑉 = √2𝐿

𝜌𝑆𝐶𝐿

Page 185: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

170

Table 6.5 Table of lift, lift coefficient and velocity at different angle of attack for

elevator

Figure 6.22 Graph of lift against angle of attack for elevator

Figure 6.23 Graph of velocity against lift for elevator

Page 186: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

171

Table 6.6 Table of lift, lift coefficient and velocity at different angle of attack for

rudder

Angle of Attack (Degree) Lift Force(N) Lift Coefficient Velocity(m/s)

-25 -0.0444 -2.7416 1.1498

-20 -0.0366 -2.1932 1.1683

-15 -0.0286 -1.6449 1.1926

-10 -0.0204 -1.0966 1.2333

-5 -0.0120 -0.5483 1.3393

0 -0.0036 0.0000 0.0000

5 0.0049 0.5483 0.8568

10 0.0134 1.0966 0.9986

15 0.0217 1.6449 1.0392

20 0.0299 2.1932 1.0560

25 0.0379 2.7416 1.0627

Figure 6.24 Graph of lift against angle of attack for rudder

Figure 6.25 Graph of velocity against lift for elevator

Page 187: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

172

Based on the analysis of lift vs angle of attack and velocity vs lift, we can

observe that increasing in angle of attack causes increasing of lift as well as lift

coefficient. On the other hand, deflecting the control surfaces downwards from the

stationary position causes the velocity to increase whereas on the opposite direction of

the deflection of the control surfaces(upwards), the velocity drops gradually. The

maximum lift exerted on the elevator and rudder at an angle of attack of -25° is

0.0441N and 0.0444N which have the velocity of 0.7247m/s (elevator) and 1.1498m/s

respectively. Hence, to determine the torque generated by the control surfaces, we can

compare the maximum lift generation on both control surfaces multiplying with the

length of the push and pull rod which is connected to the servo motor. These values

are eventually with the servo torque in order to determine the effectivity and efficiency

of the servo motor. The mathematical expression to calculate the torque for rudder and

elevator are as follows:

Figure 6.26 Free body diagram of torque calculation

Elevator

Torque, τ = r × Fsinθ

= (0.18) × Fsinθ

= (0.18) × 0.0441sin25°

= 3.3547 × 10−3N.m

Rudder

Torque, τ = r × Fsinθ

= (0.12) × Fsinθ

= (0.12) × 0.0441sin25°

= 2.2365 × 10−3N. m

Page 188: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

173

Based on the results obtained, the servo torque is greater than the calculated

torque. Hence, we can conclude that servo motor torque is sufficient to withstand the

lift of both the rudder and elevator surfaces.

6.4 Strength of adhesive on the joint between tail and fuselage

Generally, the construction of the tail part and fuselage are done separately.

These will then be assembled as per the plan or drawing. To do so, a proper selection

of glue is vital as well as analysis on the strength of the glue to withstand the force

generated by the tail on the attachment(fuselage) is closely monitored as to prevent

structural damage due to stress accumulation and overstressing the fuselage. On the

other hand, adhesive bond strength is usually measured by the simple single lap shear

test. Since the stress distribution in the adhesive is not uniform over the bond area, the

reported shear stress is lower than the true ultimate strength of the adhesive. Hence,

for our design, an analysis on the shear strength is done through plotting a shear

diagrams for horizontal and vertical stabilizers at three different load factors. Such

results are compared with the shear strength of the selected glue based on the technical

manual. The steps of the analysis are as follows:

6.4.1 Selection of Glue and Comparison on Theoretical Strength against Glue

Strength based on Technical Data

For our design purpose, the proposed glue for the attachment between fuselage and

horizontal and vertical tails are by means of using Gorilla Glue. The following Figure

6.27 shows the physical properties of the glue as well as its benefits. The details are as

follows:

Page 189: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

174

Figure 6.27 Features and benefits of proposed glue

From the Figure 6.27, the theoretical shear stress of horizontal stabilizer is

272.5Pa ≤ τ ≤ 1.36KPa whereas the theoretical shear stress of vertical stabilizer is

102.19Pa ≤ τ ≤ 510.96Pa. By comparing the theoretical shear stress with the shear

strength of the glue (stated above) which is 3500 psi(24.13MPa), the glue has high

tendency to withstand the calculated shear stress and this is turn can made a conclusion

that the structural integrity of the attachment between tails and fuselage are maintained

to an airworthy condition.

Page 190: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

175

CHAPTER 7

FLIGHT PLANNING AND TESTING

7.1 Flight Test

Flight testing is developed and gathers data during flight of an aircraft, or

atmospheric testing of launch vehicles and reusable spacecraft, and then analyzes the

data to evaluate the aerodynamic flight characteristics of the vehicle in order to

validate the design, including safety aspects.

The flight test phase accomplishes two major tasks:

1) finding and fixing any design problems

2) verifying and documenting the vehicle capabilities

The flight test phase can range from the test of a single new system for an

existing vehicle to the complete development and certification of a new aircraft.

7.1.1 Pre-Flight Test

The Aircraft

Always do a detailed check on the plane and take time over it. There have been

many examples of jacking pads left on aircraft and tapes covering hinges. If the aircraft

has been cleaned or painted, pay careful attention as these activities can give rise to

numerous “knock on” technical issues such as pitot or sensor damage.

Remember also all those systems that may have been required to be put into

the Ground Test position to allow certain ground checks to be completed prior to flight

clearance. Know what they are and make sure that they are all correctly re-positioned

Page 191: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

176

to the flight position prior to flight. Apply the principle that if it can happen, it will

happen. Your job as checker is to ensure that there is no adverse effect on the flight.

You will also need to think carefully about the weight and Centre of Gravity

(CG) for the check flight. An advice would be to try to put the aircraft into a weight

and loading situation with which you feel comfortable and use it as a standard for all

subsequent similar flights. Set up a mid CG if possible, avoid being on the limits and

do consider the effect of the weight and CG on the expected “feel” of the controls.

Expect that the aircraft will inevitably be much lighter than the aircraft on the line. No

big problem there, but think about it and consider the speeds to be used in relation to

stall speed and Minimum Control Speed. It may be that whilst you would normally be

stall speed limited, you may now be on or near the Minimum Control Speed in the Air

(Vmca) limits.

Airfield

The airfield to be used is rarely a choice matter but it is wise to consider any

implications stemming from the airfield itself. The runway capability and its effect on

performance, high ground and obstacles, all need to be considered as well as the

general operational situation.

Weather

During certification development flight testing, the weather criteria often drive

the ability to carry out a given test. However, in the check flight world it is rare to have

the privilege of waiting for perfect weather. That said, it is certainly wise to know what

the bottom line is for the checks to be undertaken.

Checklists

The check crew will need to be able to think and work the standard checklist

(whilst still understanding and recognising its importance) and be comfortable doing

so. Checklists should still be used but they should be used for guidance and not treated

as if they are the Law. No checklist can cover all check situations.

Page 192: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

177

7.1.2 Preparation

Flight test preparation begins well before the particular aircraft is ready to fly.

Each single test is known as a Test Point. The document used to prepare a single test

flight for an aircraft is known as a Test Card. This will consist of a description of the

Test Points to be flown. Once the flight test data requirements are established, the RC

plane is instrumented to record that data for analysis. The instrumentation parameters

recorded during a flight test for this project are:

Atmospheric (static) pressure and temperature;

Dynamic pressure and temperature, measured at various positions around the

fuselage;

Structural loads in the wings and fuselage

Aircraft attitude, angle of attack, and angle of sideslip;

Accelerations in all six degrees of freedom, measured with accelerometers at

different positions in the aircraft

Battery performance parameters (pressure and temperature at various stages).

Specific calibration instruments, whose behavior has been determined from

previous tests, may be brought on board to supplement the aircraft's in-built probes.

7.1.3 Execution

When the RC plane is completely assembled, ground testing is then conducted.

This allows exploring multiple aspects: basic aircraft vehicle operation, battery

performance and provides a first look at structural loads. The aircraft can then proceed

with its maiden flight, a major milestone in any aircraft.

There are several aspects to a flight test program, among which:

Handling qualities, which evaluates the aircraft's controllability and response

to pilot inputs throughout the range of flight;

Page 193: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

178

Performance testing evaluates aircraft in relation to its projected abilities,

such as speed, range, power available, drag and so forth;

Avionics/systems testing verifies all electronic systems perform as designed;

Structural loads measure the stresses on the airframe, dynamic components,

and controls to verify structural integrity in all flight regimes.

Emergency situations are evaluated as a normal part of all flight test program.

For example, battery failure during various phases of flight (takeoff, cruise, landing)

and systems failures. The primary goal of a flight test program is to gather accurate

engineering data, often on a design that is not fully proven.

7.1.4 Analysis and reporting

It analyze the internal and outer part of the flight by checking all parts.

Reporting includes the analyzed data result. Aircraft performance has various missions

such as takeoff, climb, cruise, descent and landing. Performance charts allow a pilot

to predict the takeoff, climb, cruise, and landing performance of an aircraft. We could

record the flight data and create performance charts based on the behavior of the

aircraft during the test flights. By using these performance charts, a pilot can determine

the runway length needed to take off and land and the time required to arrive at the

destination.

It is important to remember that the data from the charts will not be accurate

if the aircraft is not in good working order or when operating under adverse conditions.

Each aircraft performs differently and, therefore, has different performance numbers.

Compute the performance of the aircraft prior to every flight, as every flight is different.

Every chart is based on certain conditions and contains notes on how to adapt the

information for flight conditions.

Page 194: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

179

7.2 Flight Test Location

The flight test location would be the defined total airspace that model aircraft

should always stay within while in the air. This area should be clear of unprotected

people, vessels, vehicles or structures. Any obstacles, structures, or areas where people

could be within this defined area should be clearly marked so that pilots know to not

overfly them. The location selected for flight testing would be the Marching

Paddock in UTM which is also known as Padang Kawad UTM to the locals there.

The particular location is selected because it has a very open environment which

is perfect for many students to test their plane. The area has an approximate

measurement of 200m x 100m. Furthermore, it could sustain a large crowd.

Since the class comprises of 39 individuals including two lecturers, there would

not be any problem in terms of over -crowding the flight test location.

Figure 7.1 Location of flight test from Google Map

Page 195: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

180

Figure 7.2 UTM Marching Paddock (Padang Kawad UTM)

However, the only obstacle encountered is the flying surface that is made of

tar. It could damage the plane when it belly lands or crashes if anything goes wrong

during the flight test. It could scrape off the surface of the plane making it less efficient.

The potholes present could also damage the plane severely.

7.3 RC Airplane pre-flight checklist

Table 7.1 Flight test checklist

Item Description Completion

Covering and

surface

No punctures in the covering or exterior surface

of the plane (any damage may indicate structural

damage or damaged linkage or wiring)

Landing gear Do the tires roll freely?

Do the tail wheel connected well with the rudder?

Propeller

Propeller secured properly

No scratches, bends, nicks on the propeller

No debris in the propeller unit

Motor

Does it spin freely without making any scraping

or rattling noises?

Does it operate smoothly without excessive

vibration?

Page 196: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

181

Battery

Is the battery securely fastened in place?

Is the battery fully charged and registering the

proper maximum voltage?

Is the battery free of damage and the pack does

not look puffy?

Electrical

connections

Are all receiver, servo, ESC and battery are fully

plugged‐in and connected properly?

Are wires affixed firmly in place by tie wraps/zip

ties, or fasteners

Are electrical connections routed away from

servo linkage and servo horn travel paths?

Servos and

linkages

All servos are secure, and linkages to servo and

control surfaces are secure

Servo horns and control horns are secure and not

loose

Servo linkages are able to move freely and are

not binding

Receiver

Is the receiver fully intact and connected?

Is the receiver antenna located away from other

electrical wiring inside the fuselage?

Transmitter

Is the transmitter battery fully charged?

The receiver is connected with transmitter to

allow the information transmission

Range check is completed successfully

Balance and

centre of

gravity

The airplane does not roll aggressively to one

side when held in the centre of the nose (by the

prop) and by the center of the tail?

Does the model balance properly when supported

at the C.G. point?

Control

surfaces

All control surface hinges are secured properly to

its respective flying surface

Make sure pushrods, linkages, clevises and

hinges are not loose

Page 197: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

182

Aileron

Are the ailerons moving as they should in

opposite directions?

When you push the right gimbal right, does the

right aileron (looking from the rear) move up and

the left move down as they should?

Elevator

Do both elevators (if applicable) move

uniformly?

When you push the right gimbal up, does the

elevator move downward?

When you pull down on the right gimbal does the

elevator move upward?

Rudder

Does the rudder move left when you move the

left gimbal to the left as it should?

Does it move right when you move the left

gimbal to the right as it should?

7.4 Performing Range Check

The purpose of the range check is to make sure the radio signal from transmitter

to receiver is strong, so that RC airplane can be operated at a normal distance away

without it going out of radio range. This is very important because if the plane does go

out of range, then all control will be lost resulting in crashing of the plane. The

procedures are as followed:

1. Turn on the transmitter and then the receiver.

2. Make sure the radio is in range check mode. This is done by pressing the F/S

button of the transmitter module for 4 seconds. As a result, the RED LED of

the transmitter module will be off and the GREEN LED will be flashing rapidly.

The effective distance is decreased to 1/30 of full range.

3. The range checker slowly walk away at least 30 metres from the airplane while

operating all the controls on the transmitter. All the controls should operate

without any problems. Do not fly the airplane if the control surface response

becomes unreliable before reaching at least 30 metres away from the plane.

Page 198: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

183

4. In order to exit the range check mode, the F/S button of the transmitter module

is pressed again. As a result, the RED LED is on to indicate that it is back to

normal operation.

7.5 Meteorological Conditions on Site

It is always necessary to check weather conditions at the site on arrival,

particulary windy and be aware that they can change. The maximum permissible wind

speed including gusts of 13.4 m/s is recommended. The pilot should be mindful of

complex wind profiles as it can occur in all types of terrain. If wind blows a model

with landing gear backwards on a smooth surface it is considered too windy to enjoy

flying. Carrying a handheld anemometer is suggested to check the wind conditions if

they are within operational ranges. However, without anemometer common sense

would tell us if the weather is too windy for flying just by feeling it.

Figure 7.3 Johor average and max wind speed and gust (kmph)

The visibility here is also very clear. It would go around 10 km which is

great for flight testing. The atmospheric pressure would be 1010 mb. The

daytime temperature is going to reach 32 °C and the temperature is going to dip to

25 °C at night. Hence, the testing would be done during day time when the sky is clear.

Page 199: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

184

Figure 7.4 Average temperature of location selected

Figure 7.5 Average rainfall days of location selected

In theory, a model aircraft weighing less than 7kg could be flown to any

altitude, with the only limitation being the requirement to keep it in sight. From 7 kg

to 20 kg the altitude is 400 ft, unless it meets the airspace requirements. In practical

terms, the requirement to keep the aircraft in sight "unaided" is the main limitation and

that restricts the altitude of smaller models in particular. Hence, we have decided to

opt to fly our plane at an altitude of 10m so that it is clearly visible in sight and ensure

that it does not collide with anything, especially other aircraft.

7.6 Flying Site

Airspace of Flying Site is the flight area, or “box”, inside of which all flying is

to take place. The flight area would be the defined total airspace that model aircraft

Page 200: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

185

should always stay within while in the air. This area should be clear of unprotected

people, vessels, vehicles or structures. Any obstacles, structures, or areas where people

could be within this defined area should be clearly marked so that pilots know to not

overfly them. The size of this “box” should be the first consideration, based on the

type of aircraft anticipated to operate on this site.

For RC scale models up to approximately 72” wingspan and is a typical size

found at many club flying sites. These models will be able to fly in a much smaller

area, about 300’ x 150’, roughly the size of a soccer field.

The flying site should consist of:

Barrier:

Designed to stop models from veering into pilots’ and/or spectators’ positions.

For example, plastic or chain-link fencing, shrubbery, etc. These may run the length

of the flight line or be short to protect a single pilot station. If using metal fencing

(chainlink) consider that the transmitter antenna needs to be in the clear of any metal

that could cause loss of signal to the aircraft.

Runway:

A runway should be designated within the overfly area on the site. This can be

grass, dirt, geotextile or hard-surface. If space allows, it might be desirable to have two

runways to be able to handle most all wind directions.

Safety Line:

Establishes the area in front of which all model flying must occur. Only

personnel associated with flying the model aircraft are allowed at or in front of the

safety line. This line can be straight, segmented, curved, or even box-shaped so that

the pilot and spectators are behind the safety line while aircraft are flying. Under

certain conditions it may be possible to achieve a flying area covering almost 360°.

Page 201: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

186

Pilot Line/Station(s):

Where all pilots will stand while flying model aircraft.

Pilot Pit Area:

Where pilots and the team stage and service their models.

Spectator line:

Where spectators can view the action. This can be a simple line of separation

or a nice viewing area complete.

Safety equipments:

First-aid kit and fire extinguisher with appropriate ratings (especially for Li-

PO fires) and sand bucket for Li-PO batteries.

Figure 7.6 The designed flying site

Page 202: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

187

REFERENCES

[1] International Civil Aviation Organization (ICAO), “Unmanned Aircraft

Systems (UAS),” Canada, 2011.

[2] D. Irvine, “Doing military’s dangerous, dull and dirty work,” Cable News Network (CNN), 16-Feb-2012.

[3] S. Hayat, E. Yanmaz, and R. Muzaffar, “Survey on Unmanned Aerial Vehicle

Networks for Civil Applications: A Communications Viewpoint,” IEEE Commun. Surv. Tutorials, vol. 18, no. 4, pp. 2624–2661, 2016.

[4] D. Lowe, “Radio Electronics: Transmitters and Receivers,” dummies: A Wiley Brand, 2016. [Online]. Available:

https://www.dummies.com/programming/electronics/components/radio-electronics-transmitters-and-receivers/. [Accessed: 05-Apr-2020].

[5] FAI Aeromodelling Commision (CIAM), “Frequencies | World Air Sports Federation,” The World Air Sports Federation, 2017. [Online]. Available:

https://www.fai.org/page/frequencies. [Accessed: 12-Apr-2020].

[6] B. Nadler, “Electric RC Flying for Cheapskates,” f/22 Press, 2008. [Online]. Available: https://books.google.com.my/books?id=spmYA7TNq10C&pg=PA56&lpg=P

A56&dq=72MHz+is+usually+used+for+model+aircraft+in+USA&source=bl&ots=SeAyfP-HDc&sig=ACfU3U0Smj85CMfFrid4og5NCh89jcPAAA&hl=en&sa=X&ved=2ahUKEwij8sqD5uHoAhUFxTgGHawMAUsQ6AEwD3oECA0QKQ#v=on

epage&. [Accessed: 12-Apr-2020].

[7] Anderson, Anderson, J. D., & Anderson, J. D. (1970, January 1).

Fundamentals of Aerodynamics. Retrieved from

https://www.abebooks.com/book-search/isbn/0072373350/ [8] Frederick, G., Kaepp, G. A., Kudelko, C. M., Schuster, P. J., Domas, F.,

Haardt, U. G., & Lenz, W. (1995). Optimization of expanded polypropylene

foam coring to improve bumper foam core energy absorbing capability. SAE transactions, 394-400.

[9] Barua, P., Sousa, T., & Scholz, D. (2013). Empennage statistics and sizing

methods for dorsal fins. Hamburg University of Applied Sciences, Hamburg, Germany.

Page 203: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

188

APPENDICES

Appendix A Subsonic airfoil selection lift-curve slope

Appendix B Two dimensional lift-curve slope

Page 204: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

189

Appendix C Two dimensional lift-curve slope

Appendix D Lift ratios – slender body theory

Page 205: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

190

Appendix E Horizontal tail location factor

Appendix F Theoretical low speed aerodynamic characteristic of various airfoil mean lines

Page 206: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

191

Appendix G Subsonic maximum lift of high aspect ratio wings

Appendix H Effect of Reynolds number on section maximum lift

Appendix I Mach number correction for subsonic maximum lift of high aspect ratio wings

Page 207: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

192

Appendix J Angle of attack increment for subsonic maximum lift of high aspect ratio wings

Appendix K Static and dynamic loading of 80grams/litre EPP Foam

Appendix L EPP Foam properties at different densities

Page 208: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

193

Appendix M Bending-Buckling Coefficient of Plates as a Function of a/b for

Various Amounts of Edge Rotational Restraint.

Appendix N Shear-Buckling-Stress Coefficient of Plates as a Function of /b

for Clamped and Hinged Edges

Page 209: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

194

Appendix O Chart of Nondimensional Compressive Buckling Stress for Long Clamped

Flanges and for Supported Plates with Edge Rotational Restraint.

Appendix P Chart of Nondimensional Shear Buckling Stress for Panels with Edge-

Rotational Restraint.

Page 210: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

195

Appendix Q Landing gear drawing

Page 211: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

196

Appendix R Aircraft wheel drawing

Page 212: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

197

APPENDIX: MINUTE MEETING

MINUTES OF MEETING 1

AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2

SCHOOL OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

DATE : 17 & 20 February 2020

TIME : 8.00 p.m. – 10.00 p.m.

PLACE : KO1 KTR

Members Present:

1. Ten Jia Yee (Chairperson)

2. Shathasivam a/l Parumasivam

3. Muhammad Imran Aiman Idris

4. Siti Mastura binti Maskor

5. Nur Amyra Mohd Aseme

6. Nur Aizat Nazihah Azmi

7. Melvin John

8. Thevan Tangaraju

9. Shakgantan Balakrishnan

10. Wee Jun Wee

11. Athiseshan Balan

Members Apologies: -

NO SUBJECT ACTION BY FEEDBAC

K

1.0 Chairperson Address

Called the meeting to order at 8.00 p.m. and

thanked the committee members for being present Chairperson

2.0 Outline of the meeting

i. Group formation

Page 213: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

198

ii. Discussion on project title

iii. Task assignation to members

3.0 Discussion

i. Group formation

A group of 11 members are divided into five sub-

group and chairperson and secretary for each sub-

group are chosen based majority agreement

between the group members.

ii. Discussion on project title

First of all, team members went through the project

title as a whole and get some basic knowledge

regarding the RC plane aircrafts. After that, the

process and importance of feasibility study were

researched.

iii. Task assignation to members

- Task is assigned by chairperson to all team

members for information searching

purpose and to distribute the tasks to be

completed.

- Gather information on existing on the RC

plane design as follows:

o Group 1: Propulsion system

o Group 2: Avionics/Control

o Group 3: Wing

o Group 4: Tail, Fuselage and

Landing Gear

o Group 5: Piloting

All members

All members

All members

4.0 Closing

Page 214: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

199

i. Summarized the decisions made at the

meeting

ii. Thanked the committee members for

contributing their suggestions during the

meeting

iii. Announced the meeting will be held on 24

February 2020 (Monday) at 2.00 p.m. at

P20 Aerolab.

Chairperson

Prepared by: Approved by:

Shatha Ten

(Shathasivam) (Ten Jia Yee)

Page 215: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

200

MINUTES OF MEETING 2

AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2

SCHOOL OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

DATE : 24 & 27 February 2020

TIME : 2.00 p.m. – 4.00 p.m

PLACE : P20 Aerolab

Group Members Present:

1. Ten Jia Yee (Chairperson)

2. Shathasivam a/l Parumasivam (Secretary)

3. Muhammad Imran Aiman Idris

4. Siti Mastura binti Maskor

5. Nur Amyra Mohd Aseme

6. Nur Aizat Nazihah Azmi

7. Melvin John

8. Thevan Tangaraju

9. Shakgantan Balakrishnan

10. Wee Jun Wee

11. Athiseshan Balan

Members Apologies: -

NO SUBJECT ACTION BY FEEDBAC

K

1.0 Chairperson Address

Called the meeting to order at 2.00 p.m. and

thanked the committee members for being present Chairperson

2.0 Outline of the meeting

i. Discussion on type of RC plane to be

designed

Page 216: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

201

ii. Analyzing the appropriate sizing and

dimension for the selected RC plane

iii. Determination of electronic parts

3.0 Discussion

i. Discussion on type of RC plane to be

designed

Types of RC planes designed were analyzed and

only one type of aircraft designed were chosen

based on the majority agreement from the group

members.

ii. Analyzing the appropriate sizing and

dimension for the selected RC plane

The entire group members were split into sub-

groups to analyze detailly every structure of the

aircraft. Besides that, the selected RC plane models

is scaled down based on our theoretical analyses.

iii. Task assignation to members

(a) Task is assigned by sub-group chairpersons to their

team members for information searching purpose

and to distribute the tasks to be completed.

- Detail explanation for an appropriate

sizing and dimension of the structures

All members

Sub – group

members

Sub-group

members

4.0 Closing

i. Summarized the decisions made at the

meeting

ii. Thanked the committee members for

contributing their suggestions during the

meeting

Chairperson

Page 217: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

202

iii. Announced the meeting will be held on 02

March 2020 (Monday) at 8.30 p.m. at

KTR K01

Prepared by: Approved by:

Shatha Ten

(Shathasivam) (Ten Jia Yee)

Page 218: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

203

MINUTES OF MEETING 3

AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2

SCHOOL OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

DATE : 02 & 04 March 2020

TIME : 8.30 p.m. – 10.45 p.m.

PLACE : KTR K01

Members Present:

1. Ten Jia Yee (Chairperson)

2. Shathasivam a/l Parumasivam (Secretary)

3. Muhammad Imran Aiman Idris

4. Siti Mastura binti Maskor

5. Nur Amyra Mohd Aseme

6. Nur Aizat Nazihah Azmi

7. Melvin John

8. Thevan Tangaraju

9. Shakgantan Balakrishnan

10. Wee Jun Wee

11. Athiseshan Balan

Members Apologies: -

NO SUBJECT ACTION BY FEEDBAC

K

1.0 Chairperson Address

Called the meeting to order at 8.30 p.m. and

thanked the committee members for being present Chairperson

2.0 Outline of the meeting

i. Discussion on sizing and dimension of the

structures

Page 219: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

204

ii. Study on material properties of the

selected material

iii. Progress from sub-group members

3.0 Discussion

i. Discussion on sizing and dimension of the

structures

All the sub-group members were shared their

current information on their parts for sizing and

dimension. Some of the dimensions need to be

modified based on the lecturer advice.

ii. Study on material properties of the selected

material

Three of the members were asked to do a study on

the material properties to compare the strength of

the materials with the calculated values. This

include yield stress, ultimate yield stress and so

forth of the selected materials.

iii. Update from sub-group members:

o Group 1: Background Study on

Electronic Parts Selection which includes

motor, propeller, battery and electronic

speed controller selection.

o Group 2: Determination of centre of

gravity (C.G)

o Group 3: Determination of wing

configuration and wing loading

o Group 4: Theoretical analysis of fuselage

which includes shear and bending

moment diagram for different load

factors. Similar concepts also performed

for empennage. Studies on the proper

All members

All members

Sub-group

members

Sub-group

members

Page 220: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

205

selection of the configuration of the

landing gear.

o Group 5: Pilots are selected for the

training purpose by the team members

agreement.

4.0 Closing

i. Summarized the decisions made at the

meeting

ii. Thanked the committee members for

contributing their suggestions during the

meeting

iii. Announced the meeting will be held on 09

March 2020 (Monday) at 8.15 p.m. at

KTR K01.

Chairperson

Prepared by: Approved by:

Shatha Ten

(Shathasivam) (Ten Jia Yee)

Page 221: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

206

MINUTES OF MEETING 4

AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2

SCHOOL OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

DATE : 09 & 11 March 2020

TIME : 8.15 p.m. – 11.25 p.m.

PLACE : KTR K01

Members Present:

1. Ten Jia Yee (Chairperson)

2. Shathasivam a/l Parumasivam (Secretary)

3. Muhammad Imran Aiman Idris

4. Siti Mastura binti Maskor

5. Nur Amyra Mohd Aseme

6. Nur Aizat Nazihah Azmi

7. Melvin John

8. Thevan Tangaraju

9. Shakgantan Balakrishnan

10. Wee Jun Wee

11. Athiseshan Balan

Members Apologies: -

NO SUBJECT ACTION BY FEEDBAC

K

1.0 Chairperson Address

Called the meeting to order at 8.15 p.m. and

thanked the committee members for being present Chairperson

2.0 Outline of the meeting

i. Progress of the sub-group members

3.0 Discussion

Page 222: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

207

i. Progress of the sub-group members:

o Group 1: Final Selection of Electronic

Parts which includes motor, propeller,

battery and electronic speed controller.

o Group 2: Confirmation of centre of

gravity (C.G) upon fixing the sizing and

dimensions of the structures. Analysis on

stability were theoretical calculated.

o Group 3: Confirmation of wing

configuration and wing loading.

Theoretical analysis on the lift

distribution of the control surfaces were

estimated based on the proved methods.

o Group 4: Addition of theoretical analysis

of fuselage which includes shear and

bending moment diagram for different

load factors. Similar concepts also

performed for empennage. Confirmation

on the proper selection of the

configuration of the landing gear upon

agreement from all the members

o Group 5: Progress of the training is

discussed on the selected pilots who have

undergone simulation training with

lecturer.

All members

All members

All members

4.0 Closing

i. Summarized the decisions made at the

meeting

ii. Thanked the committee members for

contributing their suggestions during the

meeting

Chairperson

Page 223: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

208

iii. Announced the meeting will be held on 15

March 2020 (Sunday) at 2.00 p.m. at P20

Aerolab and KTR K01.

Prepared by: Approved by:

Shatha Ten

(Shathasivam) (Ten Jia Yee)

Page 224: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

209

MINUTES OF MEETING 5

AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2

SCHOOL OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

DATE : 15 March 2020

TIME : 2.00 p.m. – 4.00 p.m. & 8.15p.m -12.30 a.m.

PLACE : P20 Aerolab & KTR K 01

Members Present:

1. Ten Jia Yee (Chairperson)

2. Shathasivam a/l Parumasivam (Secretary)

3. Muhammad Imran Aiman Idris

4. Siti Mastura binti Maskor

5. Nur Amyra Mohd Aseme

6. Nur Aizat Nazihah Azmi

7. Melvin John

8. Thevan Tangaraju

9. Shakgantan Balakrishnan

10. Wee Jun Wee

11. Athiseshan Balan

Members Apologies: -

NO SUBJECT ACTION BY FEEDBAC

K

1.0 Chairperson Address

Called the meeting to order at 2.00 p.m.&8.15p.m.

and thanked the committee members for being

present

Chairperson

2.0 Outline of the meeting

i. Compiling all the team members work for

first draft submission

Page 225: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

210

ii. Preparation for video shooting of the

presentation

3.0 Discussion

i. Compiling all the team members work for

first draft submission.

All the team members work is combined and

rearrange according to the team members

agreement. The flow of the report was also

discussed and assigned before compiling all the

materials into the first draft report for submission.

ii. Preparation for video shooting of the

presentation

Location for the video shooting were determined

and all the props were prepared before

commencing the video shooting.

All members

All members

4.0 Closing

i. Summarized the decisions made at the

meeting

ii. Thanked the committee members for

contributing their suggestions during the

meeting

Chairperson

Page 226: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

211

iii. Announced the meeting will be held on 16

March 2020 (Monday) at 2.00 p.m. at P20

Aerolab for video shooting

iv. Report and video have been sent to

lecturer on 17th March 2020

Prepared by: Approved by:

Shatha Ten

(Shathasivam) (Ten Jia Yee)

Page 227: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

212

MINUTES OF MEETING 6

AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2

SCHOOL OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

DATE : 01 April 2020

TIME : 10.15 a.m. – 11.35a.m.

PLACE : WEBEX

Members Present:

1. Ten Jia Yee (Chairperson)

2. Shathasivam a/l Parumasivam (Secretary)

3. Muhammad Imran Aiman Idris

4. Siti Mastura binti Maskor

5. Nur Amyra Mohd Aseme

6. Nur Aizat Nazihah Azmi

7. Melvin John

8. Thevan Tangaraju

9. Shakgantan Balakrishnan

10. Wee Jun Wee

11. Athiseshan Balan

Members Apologies: -

NO SUBJECT ACTION BY FEEDBAC

K

1.0 Chairperson Address

Called the meeting to order at 10.15 a.m. and

thanked the committee members for being present Chairperson

2.0 Outline of the meeting

i. Discussion on report corrected by lecturer

3.0 Discussion

Page 228: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

213

i. Discussion on report corrected by lecturer

A detail discussion is done on every part that need

to be modified based on the lecturer advice. Every

members of the sub-group are advised to create

their own what’ sup group to discussed the

corrections. The corrections that need to be done

are as follows:

1. For location of CG, give the dimension/

distance

2. Support the wing, fuselage and tail

configuration with value, not only description.

3. Explain reasons or background study of

electronic parts selection

4. In aircraft specification slide, not only state but

also explain the value and its meaning.

5. Include sizing calculation of control surface

and show actual 3D drawing with colour and

render.

6. Argument /references to confirm that this CG

is correct and stable for aircraft

7. Calculate moment/torque produce by the

control surfaces at different airspeed and

deflection angle and relate with the servo

strength.

8. Confirm the obtained value with current

regulations and procedure.

9. Missing information:

i. Communication signals(transmitter-

receiver)

ii. Control and stability analysis (lateral and

longitudinal stability)

iii. Electronics and wirings

All sub-group

members

Page 229: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

214

iv. Flight testing and planning and preparation

v. Project milestone

vi. Structural analysis of attachment part

vii. Thrust available and thrust required.

4.0 Closing

i. Summarized the decisions made at the

meeting

ii. Thanked the committee members for

contributing their suggestions during the

meeting

iii. Announced a duration of two weeks

interval has been given to modify all the

details and next meeting will be held on 15

April 2020 (Wednesday) at 2.00 p.m. at

WEBEX.

Chairperson

Prepared by: Approved by:

Shatha Ten

(Shathasivam) (Ten Jia Yee)

Page 230: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

215

MINUTES OF MEETING 7

AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2

SCHOOL OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

DATE : 15 April 2020

TIME : 2.00 p.m. – 3.15p.m.

PLACE : WEBEX

Members Present:

1. Ten Jia Yee (Chairperson)

2. Shathasivam a/l Parumasivam (Secretary)

3. Muhammad Imran Aiman Idris

4. Siti Mastura binti Maskor

5. Nur Amyra Mohd Aseme

6. Nur Aizat Nazihah Azmi

7. Melvin John

8. Thevan Tangaraju

9. Shakgantan Balakrishnan

10. Wee Jun Wee

11. Athiseshan Balan

Members Apologies: -

NO SUBJECT ACTION BY FEEDBAC

K

1.0 Chairperson Address

Called the meeting to order at 2.13 p.m. and

thanked the committee members for being present Chairperson

2.0 Outline of the meeting

i. Discussion of the progress of work from

all the sub-group members and creation of

one new sub-group for flight testing and

Page 231: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

216

planning (combination of piloting and

flight testing and planning)

3.0 Discussion

i. Discussion of the progress of work from all the

sub-group members and creation of one new

sub-group for flight testing and planning:

o Group 1: Updates and modifications on the

aircraft performance and related

calculations of it. Proper selection of

motor, propeller, battery and electronic

speed controller.

o Group 2: Updates and modifications on the

CG locations, stability, communication

signals (transmitter- receiver),

communication resolution and antennas

o Group 3: Updates and modifications on the

shear and bending stress of wing with and

without ailerons and wing loading and lift

distribution on the aileron at different angle

of attack.

o Group 4: Updates and modifications on the

analysis of fuselage, empennage that

consist of shear and bending moment

diagram and flexural analysis. Landing

gear structural analysis also done.

o Group 5: Updates on the flight test that

include pre-flight test, planning, execution

and analysis and reporting. Flight Test

Location is also chosen.

All sub-group

members

4.0 Closing

Page 232: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

217

i. Summarized the decisions made at the

meeting

ii. Thanked the committee members for

contributing their suggestions during the

meeting

iii. Announced a duration of two-week

interval has been given to modify all the

details and next meeting will be held on 29

April 2020 (Wednesday) at 2.00 p.m. at

WEBEX.

Chairperson

Prepared by: Approved by:

Shatha Ten (Shathasivam) (Ten Jia Yee)

Page 233: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

218

MINUTES OF MEETING 8

AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2

SCHOOL OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

DATE : 29 April 2020

TIME : 2.00 p.m. – 3.25p.m.

PLACE : WEBEX

Members Present:

1. Ten Jia Yee (Chairperson)

2. Shathasivam a/l Parumasivam (Secretary)

3. Muhammad Imran Aiman Idris

4. Siti Mastura binti Maskor

5. Nur Amyra Mohd Aseme

6. Nur Aizat Nazihah Azmi

7. Melvin John

8. Thevan Tangaraju

9. Shakgantan Balakrishnan

10. Wee Jun Wee

11. Athiseshan Balan

Members Apologies: -

NO SUBJECT ACTION BY FEEDBAC

K

1.0 Chairperson Address

Called the meeting to order at 2.10 p.m. and

thanked the committee members for being present Chairperson

2.0 Outline of the meeting

i. Final updates from the sub-group members

3.0 Discussion

Page 234: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

219

i. Final updates from the sub-group members

(b) All the sub-group members were asked to confirm

the works that has been done by them. This include

of arrange the titles, sub-title and other information

in orderly manner to ease the work of compiling. It

also emphasized to them to justify the paragraph

and choosing the same font size to standardize the

report. Only some additional update is update by

flight testing and planning sub-group such as RC

plane pre-flight checklist, performing range check,

meteorological condition and site as well as flying

site.

(c)

(d)

(e)

(f)

(g)

(h)

(i)

(j)

All sub-group

members

4.0 Closing

Page 235: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

220

i. Summarized the decisions made at the

meeting

ii. Thanked the committee members for

contributing their suggestions during the

meeting

iii. Announced the meeting will be held on 3

May 2020 (Friday) at 2.30 p.m. at

WEBEX.

Chairperson

Prepared by: Approved by:

Shatha Ten

(Shathasivam) (Ten Jia Yee)

Page 236: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

221

MINUTES OF MEETING 9

AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2

SCHOOL OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

DATE : 03 May 2020

TIME : 2.30 p.m. – 3.15 p.m.

PLACE : WEBEX

Members Present:

1. Ten Jia Yee (Chairperson)

2. Shathasivam a/l Parumasivam (Secretary)

3. Muhammad Imran Aiman Idris

4. Siti Mastura binti Maskor

5. Nur Amyra Mohd Aseme

6. Nur Aizat Nazihah Azmi

7. Melvin John

8. Thevan Tangaraju

9. Shakgantan Balakrishnan

10. Wee Jun Wee

11. Athiseshan Balan

Members Apologies: -

NO SUBJECT ACTION BY FEEDBAC

K

1.0 Chairperson Address

Called the meeting to order at 2.35 p.m. and

thanked the committee members for being present Chairperson

2.0 Outline of the meeting

i. Compiling all the team members work for

first draft submission.

Page 237: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

222

3.0 Discussion

i. Compiling all the team members work for

first draft submission.

All the team members work is combined and

rearrange according to the team members

agreement. The flow of the report was also

discussed and assigned before compiling all the

materials into the first draft report for submission.

All sub-group

members

4.0 Closing

i. Summarized the decisions made at the

meeting

ii. Thanked the committee members for

contributing their suggestions during the

meeting

iii. Report has been sent to lecturer on 4th

May 2020 through whatsup

Chairperson

Prepared by: Approved by:

Shatha Ten

(Shathasivam) (Ten Jia Yee)

Page 238: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

223

MINUTES OF MEETING 10

AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2

SCHOOL OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

DATE : 11 May 2020

TIME : 9.00 p.m.-10.00p.m.

PLACE : WEBEX

Members Present:

1. Ten Jia Yee (Chairperson)

2. Shathasivam a/l Parumasivam (Secretary)

3. Muhammad Imran Aiman Idris

4. Siti Mastura binti Maskor

5. Nur Amyra Mohd Aseme

6. Nur Aizat Nazihah Azmi

7. Melvin John

8. Thevan Tangaraju

9. Shakgantan Balakrishnan

10. Wee Jun Wee

11. Athiseshan Balan

Members Apologies: -

NO SUBJECT ACTION BY FEEDBAC

K

1.0 Chairperson Address

Called the meeting to order at 9.08 p.m. and

thanked the committee members for being present Chairperson

2.0 Outline of the meeting

i. Correction on the report based on lecturer

advice.

Page 239: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

224

3.0 Discussion

i. Correction on the report based on lecturer

advice.

Graphs and diagrams left without explanations and

discussions. Interpretation and descriptions are

validated with comparisons on the current

available aviation laws and regulations. All the

sub-groups are advised to interpret the graphs and

diagrams with proper validations based on the

current available laws and regulations.

4.0 Closing

i. Summarized the decisions made at the

meeting

ii. Thanked the committee members for

contributing their suggestions during the

meeting

iii. Announced a duration of two-weeks

interval has been given to modify all the

details and next meeting will be held on 25

May 2020 (Monday) at 2.00 p.m. at

WEBEX.

Chairperson

Prepared by: Approved by:

Shatha Ten

(Shathasivam) (Ten Jia Yee)

Page 240: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

225

MINUTES OF MEETING 11

AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2

SCHOOL OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

DATE : 25 May 2020

TIME : 2.00 p.m. – 3.45 p.m.

PLACE : WEBEX

Members Present:

1. Ten Jia Yee (Chairperson)

2. Shathasivam a/l Parumasivam (Secretary)

3. Muhammad Imran Aiman Idris

4. Siti Mastura binti Maskor

5. Nur Amyra Mohd Aseme

6. Nur Aizat Nazihah Azmi

7. Melvin John

8. Thevan Tangaraju

9. Shakgantan Balakrishnan

10. Wee Jun Wee

11. Athiseshan Balan

Members Apologies: -

NO SUBJECT ACTION BY FEEDBAC

K

1.0 Chairperson Address

Called the meeting to order at 2.10 p.m. and

thanked the committee members for being present Chairperson

2.0 Outline of the meeting

i. Final updates from the sub-group members

3.0 Discussion

Page 241: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

226

i. Final updates from the sub-group members

All the team members work is combined and

rearrange according to the team members

agreement. The flow of the report was also

discussed and assigned before compiling all the

materials into the first draft report for submission.

Members are also advised to check none of the

graphs and diagrams are left unexplained and all

the graphs and diagrams are checked by

exchanging the files among other sub-group

members. Once done, the files are copied and

pasted into new folder and it is arranged based on

the thesis format.

All sub-group

members

4.0 Closing

i. Summarized the decisions made at the

meeting and members are give four days

to check the entire report.

ii. Thanked the committee members for

contributing their suggestions during the

meeting

iii. Announced the meeting will be held on 30

May 2020 (Tuesday) at 12.30p.m at

WEBEX.

Chairperson

Prepared by: Approved by:

Shatha Ten

(Shathasivam) (Ten Jia Yee)

Page 242: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

227

MINUTES OF MEETING 12

AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2

SCHOOL OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

DATE : 01 June 2020

TIME : 12.30 p.m. – 2.10 p.m.

PLACE : WEBEX & WHATSAPP

Members Present:

1. Ten Jia Yee (Chairperson)

2. Shathasivam a/l Parumasivam (Secretary)

3. Muhammad Imran Aiman Idris

4. Siti Mastura binti Maskor

5. Nur Amyra Mohd Aseme

6. Nur Aizat Nazihah Azmi

7. Melvin John

8. Thevan Tangaraju

9. Shakgantan Balakrishnan

10. Wee Jun Wee

11. Athiseshan Balan

Members Apologies: -

NO SUBJECT ACTION BY FEEDBAC

K

1.0 Chairperson Address

Called the meeting to order at 12.35 p.m. and

thanked the committee members for being present Chairperson

2.0 Outline of the meeting

i. Confirmation on the checking of

unexplained graphs and diagrams of other

sub-group members

Page 243: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

228

3.0 Discussion

i. Confirmation on the checking of unexplained

graphs and diagrams of other sub-group

members.

(k) All the members were confirmed of their checking

process before compiling is executed. The files are

then compiled based on the suggested thesis

format. Proper page number, font, font size,

justified and space were emphasized before the

submission of the report to the lecturer.

All sub-group

members

4.0 Closing

i. Summarized the decisions made at the

meeting

ii. Thanked the committee members for

contributing their suggestions during the

meeting

iii. Completed report is submitted to the

lecturer through whatsup on 01 June 2020.

Chairperson

Prepared by: Approved by:

Shatha Ten

(Shathasivam) (Ten Jia Yee)

Page 244: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

229

MINUTES OF MEETING 13

AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2

SCHOOL OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

DATE : 17 June 2020

TIME : 10.30 a.m. – 11.10 a.m.

PLACE : WHATSAPP

Members Present:

1. Ten Jia Yee (Chairperson)

2. Shathasivam a/l Parumasivam (Secretary)

3. Muhammad Imran Aiman Idris

4. Siti Mastura binti Maskor

5. Nur Amyra Mohd Aseme

6. Nur Aizat Nazihah Azmi

7. Melvin John

8. Thevan Tangaraju

9. Shakgantan Balakrishnan

10. Wee Jun Wee

11. Athiseshan Balan

Members Apologies: -

NO SUBJECT ACTION BY FEEDBAC

K

1.0 Chairperson Address

Called the meeting to order at 10.30 a.m. and

thanked the committee members for being present Chairperson

2.0 Outline of the meeting

i. Video preparation for each sub-group

ii. Preparation for submission of final report

3.0 Discussion

Page 245: SKMA 4523 AIRCRAFT DESIGN 2 FINAL PROJECT REPORT...4.5.1 Schrenk’s Approximation Method 101 4.5.2 Sample Calculation 108 4.6 Wing Mounting 109 CHAPTER 5 FUSELAGE, AND LANDING GEAR

230

i. Video preparation for each sub-group (l)

(m) All the sub-group members were advised to do

their parts presentation based on their discussion

within the group and the shared video is compiled

by Thevan A/L Thangaraju.

ii. Preparation for submission of final report

All the sub-group members are instructed by the

chairperson to check all the particulars are

available before the report is compiled. Secretariat

(Shatha) is instructed to compiled the final report

with the accumulated minutes of meeting.

All sub-group

members

4.0 Closing

i. Summarized the decisions made at the

meeting

ii. Thanked the committee members for

contributing their suggestions during the

meeting and their cooperation in

performing the duties for this subject to be

accomplished.

iii. Completed Final report is submitted to the

lecturer through whatsup on 30 June 2020.

Chairperson

Prepared by: Approved by:

_Shatha___________ Ten

(Shathasivam) (Ten Jia Yee)